WO2014203707A1 - Substrate with decorative material pattern, method for producing same, multilayer material for decorative material formation, and decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation - Google Patents

Substrate with decorative material pattern, method for producing same, multilayer material for decorative material formation, and decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014203707A1
WO2014203707A1 PCT/JP2014/064370 JP2014064370W WO2014203707A1 WO 2014203707 A1 WO2014203707 A1 WO 2014203707A1 JP 2014064370 W JP2014064370 W JP 2014064370W WO 2014203707 A1 WO2014203707 A1 WO 2014203707A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
layer
substrate
decorative material
photosensitive resin
material pattern
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/064370
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
吉成 伸一
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2014203707A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014203707A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/16Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin specially treated, e.g. irradiated
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/06Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2451/00Decorative or ornamental articles

Definitions

  • the exterior of electronic devices such as mobile phones and smartphones is generally configured by combining a front exterior and a rear exterior.
  • decorative material patterns such as borders, letters, logo marks, and the like are formed by printing, and decoration has been applied.
  • Such a decorating material pattern is usually provided as a laminate of a decorating material pattern and a base color layer for enhancing the coloring and visibility of the decorating material pattern.
  • a touch panel type input device is arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal device or the like, and a finger or a touch pen is touched on the position where the instruction image is displayed while referring to the instruction image displayed in the image display area of the liquid crystal device.
  • the touch panel that can input information corresponding to the instruction image has been used.
  • Patent Document 2 is formed by laminating a glitter layer containing a pearl pigment, a pattern layer laminated by offset printing, and a concealing layer on the surface of a base film formed of a polyethylene terephthalate film or an acrylic film.
  • the disclosed decorative film is disclosed, and can be produced in a small lot and in a short delivery time, and can provide a decorative film and a decorative molded product with a design that requires gradation expression. Has been.
  • the problem to be solved by the present invention is a method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern that has a simple process, low production cost, little variation in the thickness of the base color layer, and a highly accurate decorating material pattern. Is to provide.
  • the inventors have made a decoration as a method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern having a decorative material pattern and a base color layer in this order on the substrate.
  • the material pattern is formed by exposure and development using a photolithography technique, and the decorative material pattern and the base color layer are exposed and developed on the support with the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive resin layer being exposed and developed.
  • a process of forming a decorative material pattern by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer of a decorative material-forming laminated material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support, and the formed decorative material pattern A step of laminating on a substrate; a step of laminating a photosensitive resin layer of a decorative material forming laminate material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support on a substrate; and exposing and developing the laminated photosensitive resin layer Forming a decorating material pattern; or Any one of the processes of laminating
  • substrate Any one of the processes of laminating
  • the laminated material for decorating material does not have a base color layer between the support and the photosensitive resin layer or the decorating material pattern.
  • [2] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (M), Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support; Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to prepare a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) in which a decorative material pattern is formed; and It is preferable to include the process of laminating
  • the method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (M),
  • a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer on a support in this order, and a decorative material pattern on the substrate It is preferable to include a step of laminating the substrate with the sides facing each other.
  • [4] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (N), Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material (A) having a photosensitive resin layer on a support; Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and A step of laminating the decorative material pattern of the decorative material forming laminate material (A) on the substrate; It is preferable to include the process of laminating
  • [5] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (N), Laminating the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material forming laminate material (A) having a photosensitive resin layer on the support on the substrate; Peeling the support from the photosensitive resin layer; Exposing the photosensitive resin layer; Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and It is preferable to include the process of laminating
  • the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of [1] to [5] has a light shielding layer between a support and a base color layer, and the base color layer and the light shield layer Are preferably laminated on the substrate in a lump.
  • the base color layer is preferably a white layer.
  • the base color layer is preferably a metallic luster layer.
  • the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [8] preferably has a transparent adhesive layer on the surface adjacent to the metallic luster layer and opposite to the support.
  • the metallic gloss layer is preferably a metal thin film layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a dye or a pigment.
  • the decorative material forming laminate material according to [14] preferably has a light shielding layer between the support and the base color layer.
  • the base color layer is preferably a white layer.
  • the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, and a transparent adhesive layer is provided adjacent to the metallic luster layer and on the surface opposite to the support.
  • the metallic luster layer is preferably a metal thin film layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a dye or a pigment.
  • a decorative material pattern-containing decoration having a decorative material pattern in which the photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for forming a decorative material according to any one of [14] to [20] is exposed and developed. Laminate material for material formation.
  • a method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern that has a simple process, low manufacturing cost, little variation in film thickness of a base color layer, and a highly accurate decorating material pattern. Can do.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention (henceforth the manufacturing method of this invention) exposes the said photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorating material formation which has a photosensitive resin layer on a support body.
  • a step of forming a decorative material pattern by developing, and a step of laminating the formed decorative material pattern on a substrate a photosensitive resin of a laminated material for forming a decorative material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support
  • a step of laminating a layer on a substrate, and a step of exposing and developing the laminated photosensitive resin layer to form a decorating material pattern or Laminating the decorative material pattern of a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer on a support to a substrate;
  • condition (M) or condition (N) is satisfied.
  • the said lamination material for decorating material formation does not have a base color layer between the said support body and the said photosensitive resin layer or the said decorating material pattern.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has small variation in the film thickness of a base color layer.
  • the film thickness variation of the base color layer is preferably within ⁇ 3%, more preferably within ⁇ 2%, particularly preferably within ⁇ 1%, and within ⁇ 0.7%. Is more particularly preferred.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention forms the decorating material pattern by exposing and developing the said photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorating material formation which has a photosensitive resin layer on a support body.
  • the manufacturing method of the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention is: A step of forming a decorating material pattern by photolithography on the photosensitive resin layer laminated on the substrate; or a decorating material pattern previously formed by photolithography on the photosensitive resin layer on the support.
  • a decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material may be used.
  • the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention is preferably any one of the following first aspect, second aspect, third aspect and fourth aspect.
  • the said conditions (M) are satisfy
  • the said conditions (M) are satisfy
  • the said conditions (N) are satisfy
  • the said conditions (N) are satisfy
  • the first aspect and the second aspect are the above-mentioned conditions ( It is preferable from the same viewpoint as when M) is satisfied, and the first aspect using the laminated material for forming a decorative material of the present invention having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support is more preferable.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention in a 3rd aspect and a 4th aspect between the support body of the laminated material for decorating material formation and the photosensitive resin layer, or a decorating material.
  • There is no base color layer between the support of the laminated material for pattern-containing decorating material formation and the decorating material pattern that is, when the condition (N) is satisfied, the condition (M) is overlapped to satisfy the condition (M). It is preferred).
  • the production method of the present invention satisfies the following condition (M) or (N).
  • a decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support may be used; the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer are exposed and developed on the support.
  • the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having the decorative material patterns in this order may be used; other decorative material forming laminate materials having a base color layer on the support May be used.
  • the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support has a structure that has not been known so far.
  • the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer are formed on the support.
  • the laminated material for forming a decorative material in order is also referred to as the laminated material for forming a decorative material of the present invention.
  • the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer on a support in this order has a conventionally unknown configuration.
  • the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer on the support in this order It is also called a laminated material for forming a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material.
  • the laminated material for decorating material formation (i) which has a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support body.
  • a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminate material (ii) having a base color layer and a decorating material pattern on the support, and other decorative material forming having a base color layer on the support also includes laminated materials.
  • filling the said condition (M) the manufacturing process of a decoration board
  • the production method of the present invention when producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern having a decorating material pattern and a base color layer on the substrate, pressure sensitivity as described in JP2011-8448A is disclosed. Even without using a heat-sensitive adhesive layer, a decorating material pattern and a base color layer can be laminated on the substrate.
  • the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the decorative material formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer contained in the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material By laminating the pattern on the substrate described later (the support may be peeled off after the lamination to transfer only the target layer), the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive layer are formed on the substrate.
  • a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the functional resin layer can be formed.
  • the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the decorative resin layer that are included in the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material are exposed and developed.
  • the material pattern preferably has the same composition as the decorative material pattern and the base color layer in the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention, but the decorative material forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material formation
  • the composition of the decorative resin pattern in which the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive resin layer in the laminated material for exposure are exposed and developed may vary depending on the production process after lamination on the substrate.
  • the decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive resin layer in the decorative material forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminated material may be changing in the decorating material pattern and the base color layer in the board
  • the laminated material for decorating material formation which has a photosensitive resin layer on a support body contains the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is not particularly limited.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is used as a coloring composition for a color filter in the photosensitive composition described in JP2010-237589A or [0071] in JP2010-237589A.
  • Materials, that is, coloring compositions described in [0046] to [0059] of JP-A-2004-347831 can be used, and the contents described in these publications are incorporated in the present invention.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a resin (A) having an acidic group in the side chain.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound (B) and a photopolymerization initiator (C), more preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and photopolymerization. It is particularly preferable that the initiator contains at least dipentaerythritol acrylate compound B1 (below) and tripentaerythritol acrylate compound B2 (below).
  • X represents a hydrogen atom or H 2 C ⁇ CR—CO—, and at least four of X in the molecule represent H 2 C ⁇ CR—CO—.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 4
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may be configured using other components such as a colorant such as a pigment or a dye (a white pigment such as a black pigment or rutile titanium oxide), a surfactant, or the like, if necessary. it can.
  • the preferable range of the white pigment used for the photosensitive resin layer is the same as the preferable range of the white pigment used for the base color layer described later.
  • colorants used in the photosensitive resin layer and preferred ranges thereof are described in [0049] to [0059] of JP-A-2004-347831 cited in [0071] of JP-A-2010-237589.
  • the colorant and the preferred range thereof are the same, and the contents described in these publications are incorporated in the present invention.
  • a coloring agent for forming a green decorative material pattern at least C.I. I. PG-36 (C.I. Pigment Green 36) and C.I. I. PY-138 (CI Pigment Yellow 138), C.I. I. PY-139 (CI Pigment Yellow 139), C.I. I. Those containing any of PY-150 (CI Pigment Yellow 150) are preferred.
  • These colorants can be changed according to the design and color of the desired decorative material pattern.
  • -Resin (A)- Resin (A) has an acidic group in the side chain. Having an acidic group in the side chain means having a structural unit (group) having an acidic group in the side chain. Even if the acidic group is directly bonded to the main chain, it has an acidic group described later. As shown in the specific examples of the monomer, it includes that an acidic group may be bonded via a linking group.
  • the resin (A) can have an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
  • the resin (A) is more preferably a group having an acidic group (structural unit): Y (y mol%), and a group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain (structural unit): X (x Mol%) and a group having an ethylenically unsaturated group (structural unit): Z (z mol%), and having other groups (L) (1 mol%) as necessary. Also good. A plurality of X, Y, and Z may be combined in one group in the resin (A).
  • the acidic group is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known ones, and examples thereof include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. Among these, a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group are preferable from the viewpoint of excellent developability and water resistance of the cured film.
  • the monomer having an acidic group in the side chain can be appropriately selected from known ones, such as (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, Fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, sorbic acid, ⁇ -cyanocinnamic acid, acrylic acid dimer, addition reaction product of monomer having hydroxyl group and cyclic acid anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone mono ( And (meth) acrylate. As these, those produced as appropriate may be used, or commercially available products may be used.
  • Examples of the monomer having a hydroxyl group used in the addition reaction product of the monomer having a hydroxyl group and a cyclic acid anhydride include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the cyclic acid anhydride include maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, and cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid and the like are preferable in terms of excellent developability and low cost.
  • a monomer which has the said "ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain As a ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
  • the connection between the ethylenically unsaturated group and the monomer is not particularly limited as long as it is a divalent linking group such as an ester group, an amide group, or a carbamoyl group.
  • the method of introducing an ethylenically unsaturated group into the side chain can be appropriately selected from known ones, for example, a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group to a group having an acidic group, or having a hydroxyl group
  • a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having an isocyanate group to the group examples include a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having an isocyanate group to the group, a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having a hydroxy group to a group having an isocyanate group, and the like.
  • the method of adding (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group to a repeating unit having an acidic group is most preferable because it is the easiest to produce and is low in cost.
  • the (meth) acrylate having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and an epoxy group is not particularly limited as long as it has these.
  • monomers are not particularly limited, for example, (meth) acrylic acid ester groups, styrene groups, vinyl ether groups, dibasic acid anhydride groups, vinyl ester groups having no branched and / or alicyclic structures, And monomers having a hydrocarbon alkenyl group.
  • limiting in particular as said vinyl ether group For example, a butyl vinyl ether group etc. are mentioned.
  • the dibasic acid anhydride group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a maleic anhydride group and an itaconic anhydride group.
  • a vinyl ester group For example, a vinyl acetate group etc. are mentioned.
  • a hydrocarbon alkenyl group For example, a butadiene group, an isoprene group, etc. are mentioned.
  • the molar composition ratio is preferably 0 to 30 mol%, and more preferably 0 to 20 mol%.
  • Specific examples of the resin (A) include compounds represented by compounds P-1 to P-35 described in paragraph numbers [0057] to [0063] of JP-A-2008-146018. Further, specific examples of the resin (A) include carboxylic acid groups in the side chain described in [0047] and [0048] of JP-A-2004-347831 cited in [0071] of JP-A-2010-237589. Examples thereof include polymers having polar groups such as carboxylic acid groups, and examples thereof include JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, and JP-B-54.
  • Methacrylic acid copolymer acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, croton as described in JP-A-25-25957, JP-A-59-53836, and JP-A-59-71048
  • examples thereof include an acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partially esterified maleic acid copolymer.
  • the cellulose derivative which has a carboxylic acid group in a side chain can also be mentioned.
  • a polymer having a hydroxyl group added to a cyclic acid anhydride can also be preferably used.
  • a copolymer of benzyl (meth) acrylate and (meth) acrylic acid or a multicomponent copolymer of benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid and other monomers described in US Pat. No. 4,139,391 Can be mentioned.
  • These binder polymers having a polar group may be used alone, or may be used in the state of a composition used in combination with an ordinary polymer having film-forming ability.
  • the content described in the publications cited as specific examples of these resins (A) is incorporated in the present invention.
  • the resin (A) is made from a two-stage process including a monomer (co) polymerization reaction process and an ethylenically unsaturated group introduction process.
  • the (co) polymerization reaction is made by a (co) polymerization reaction of various monomers, and is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known ones.
  • radical polymerization, cationic polymerization, anionic polymerization, coordination polymerization and the like can be appropriately selected for the active species of polymerization.
  • radical polymerization is preferable from the viewpoint of easy synthesis and low cost.
  • limiting in particular also about the polymerization method It can select suitably from well-known things. For example, a bulk polymerization method, a suspension polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a solution polymerization method and the like can be appropriately selected. Among these, the solution polymerization method is more desirable.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) suitable for the resin (A) is preferably 40 to 180 ° C, more preferably 45 to 140 ° C, and particularly preferably 50 to 130 ° C. When the glass transition temperature (Tg) is within the preferred range, good developability and mechanical strength can be obtained.
  • the preferred range of the acid value suitable for the resin (A) varies depending on the molecular structure that can be taken, but generally it is preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and 70 to 130 mgKOH / g. It is particularly preferred that When the acid value is within the preferred range, good developability and mechanical strength can be obtained.
  • the resin (A) preferably has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of 40 to 180 ° C. and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of obtaining good developability and mechanical strength. Furthermore, the preferable example of the said resin (A) has more preferable each combination of the said preferable molecular weight, glass transition temperature (Tg), and an acid value.
  • Resin (A) has a group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain: X (x mol%), a group having an acidic group: Y (y mol%), and an ethylenically unsaturated group. From the viewpoint of deformation recovery rate, development residue, vibration resistance, and reticulation, it is preferably a copolymer of at least ternary copolymer having the group: Z (z mol%) in different copolymer units. . Specifically, a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing at least one of the monomers constituting the X, Y, and Z is preferable.
  • the copolymer composition ratio of the respective components of the resin (A) is determined in consideration of the glass transition temperature and the acid value, and cannot be generally stated, but “group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain” "Is preferably 10 to 70 mol%, more preferably 15 to 65 mol%, and particularly preferably 20 to 60 mol%. When the group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain is within the above range, good developability is obtained and the developer resistance of the image area is also good.
  • the “group having an acidic group in the side chain” is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 60 mol%, and particularly preferably 20 to 50 mol%.
  • the “group having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain” is preferably 10 to 70 mol%, more preferably 20 to 70 mol%, particularly preferably 30 to 70 mol%.
  • the pigment dispersibility is excellent, and the developability and curability are also good.
  • the content of the resin (A) is preferably 5 to 70% by mass and more preferably 10 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive composition.
  • the resin (A) can contain other resins described later, but only the resin (A) is preferable.
  • the other resin that can be used in combination with the resin (A) is preferably a compound that shows swelling property with respect to an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably a compound that is soluble in the alkaline aqueous solution.
  • the resin exhibiting swellability or solubility with respect to an alkaline aqueous solution for example, those having an acidic group are preferably mentioned. Specifically, an ethylenically unsaturated double bond and an acidic group are introduced into an epoxy compound.
  • the acidic group is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the intended purpose. Examples thereof include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Among these, the availability of raw materials, etc. From the viewpoint, a carboxyl group is preferable.
  • the total content of the resin (A) and other resins that can be used in combination is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 50% by mass, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive composition. preferable.
  • the solid content is less than 5% by mass, the film strength of the photosensitive layer described later tends to be weak, and the tackiness of the surface of the photosensitive layer may be deteriorated. Sensitivity may decrease.
  • the said content has shown that solid content.
  • the polymerizable compound (B) preferably contains at least the compounds B1 and B2.
  • the contents W1 (% by mass) and W2 (% by mass) with respect to the total amount of the polymerizable compound (B) of the compound B1 and the compound B2 are represented by the following formulas (1) and (2). It is preferable to satisfy them simultaneously.
  • the content of compound B1 with respect to the total amount of polymerizable compound (B) is W1 (mass%)
  • the content of compound B2 with respect to the total amount of polymerizable compound (B) is W2 (mass%).
  • the said photosensitive composition will be able to provide the decorating material pattern with high dynamic strength which can endure the vibration with a high frequency. .
  • compound B1 are specifically dipentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and their A mixture is mentioned.
  • dipentaerythritol pentamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and mixtures thereof are more preferred.
  • tripentaerythritol heptamethacrylate tripentaerythritol octamethacrylate
  • tripentaerythritol heptaacrylate tripentaerythritol octaacrylate
  • tripentaerythritol octaacrylate tripentaerythritol octaacrylate, and mixtures thereof are more preferred.
  • polymerizable compounds that can be used in combination include the components described in paragraph No. [0011] of JP-A-2006-23696 and the components described in paragraph Nos. [0040] to [0049] of JP-A-2006-64921. Can be used together.
  • the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of thinning, the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m. Is more preferable, 0.5 to 7 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 1 to 5 ⁇ m is particularly preferable. Usually, when a white layer is provided, sufficient hiding power and whiteness cannot be obtained unless the thickness is several tens of ⁇ m or more.
  • a white photosensitive resin layer is provided on a metallic luster layer (for example, a metal thin film layer such as an aluminum vapor deposition layer).
  • the thickness of the white photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 to 20 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of thinning and hiding power, and preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m. More preferably, it is 3 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the preferable range of the thickness of the decorating material pattern mentioned later is the same as the preferable range of the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the said laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation has a support body.
  • the support is preferably flexible and does not cause significant deformation, shrinkage or elongation even under pressure, or under pressure and heat.
  • Examples of such a support include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film, and among them, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the support is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 300 ⁇ m, more preferably 20 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the support may be transparent or may contain dyed silicon, alumina sol, chromium salt, zirconium salt, or the like. Further, the support can be provided with conductivity by a method described in JP-A-2005-221726.
  • the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material used in the method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention includes a base color layer.
  • the base color layer is preferably a white layer from the viewpoint of reflecting the color of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the base color layer may be required to be a metallic luster layer from the viewpoint of a preferable design.
  • the background color layer is a white layer and a metallic luster layer will be described.
  • the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments, and the base color layer may have other colors other than the white layer and the metal luster layer. It may be a layer.
  • the white layer preferably contains a resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention may contain components other than the said pigment in the said white layer, unless it is contrary to the meaning of this invention.
  • the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain is not particularly limited, but a silicone resin is preferable.
  • Known silicone resins can be used.
  • a methyl-based straight silicone resin, a methylphenyl-based straight silicone resin, an acrylic resin-modified silicone resin, a polyester resin-modified silicone resin, an epoxy resin-modified silicone resin, an alkyd resin, a modified silicone resin, and a rubber-based silicone resin can be used. More preferred are methyl straight silicone resin, methylphenyl straight silicone resin, and acrylic resin-modified silicone resin, and particularly preferred are methyl straight silicone resin and methylphenyl straight silicone resin.
  • the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the film physical properties can be controlled by mixing these at an arbitrary ratio.
  • a commercially available resin may be used, and for example, KR300, KR311, KR251, X40-9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) can be used.
  • KR251 and X40-9246 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.
  • KR251 and X40-9246 are more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion and workability when slitting the material.
  • KR251 and X40-9246 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.
  • Two types of mixtures of these are especially preferable.
  • the content of the component other than the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the pigment in the white layer is preferably 30% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the white layer.
  • the content of the component other than the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the pigment is within the above range, the color of the white layer of the present invention can be favorably affected.
  • the content of the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the components other than the pigment in the white layer is preferably 30 to 60% by mass, more preferably 35 to 55% by mass, and 40 to 50% by mass. More particularly preferred.
  • the color material for the white layer is preferably a pigment, and more preferably a white inorganic pigment.
  • a metal thin film layer preferably a metal deposition layer such as aluminum, chromium, silver, etc.
  • metallic pigments aluminum, chromium, silver, aluminum flakes, etc.
  • a layer containing a material such as a metallic pigment having a metallic luster As a means for providing a metallic luster layer, a layer containing a material such as a metallic pigment having a metallic luster, a method of laminating by metal vapor deposition, metal sputtering, or plating on a support used in the production method of the present invention is manufactured according to the present invention.
  • a transfer material in which a layer containing a material such as a metallic pigment having a metallic luster is formed separately by a known method such as coating on a support used in the method is prepared, and then used in the manufacturing method of the present invention.
  • a method of transferring or laminating the transfer material on a support can be mentioned.
  • the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, a substrate and a metallic luster layer integrated may be used.
  • the surface of titanium oxide can be used in combination with silica treatment, alumina treatment, titania treatment, zirconia treatment, organic matter treatment and the like. Thereby, the catalytic activity of titanium oxide can be suppressed, and heat resistance, fluorescence, etc. can be improved.
  • the surface treatment of the titanium oxide is preferably an alumina treatment or a zirconia treatment, and an alumina / zirconia combined treatment is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the white inorganic pigment with respect to the total solid content of the white layer is 20 to 75% by mass, and the brightness and whiteness (L It is possible to form a decorating material having a high value and a low a value and a low b value) and satisfying other required characteristics at the same time.
  • the content of the white inorganic pigment with respect to the total solid content of the white layer is more preferably 25 to 60% by mass, and further preferably 30 to 50% by mass.
  • the total solid content of the white layer means the total mass of nonvolatile components excluding the solvent and the like from the white layer.
  • the white inorganic pigment (which is the same for other pigments used in the light shielding layer described later) is desirably used as a dispersion.
  • This dispersion can be prepared by adding and dispersing a composition obtained by previously mixing the white inorganic pigment and the pigment dispersant in an organic solvent (or vehicle).
  • the vehicle refers to a portion of a medium in which a pigment is dispersed when the paint is in a liquid state, and is a liquid component that binds to the pigment to form a coating film (binder) and dissolves and dilutes it.
  • Component organic solvent
  • the dispersing machine used for dispersing the white inorganic pigment is not particularly limited, and is described in, for example, Asakura Kunizo, “Encyclopedia of Pigments”, first edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, item 438.
  • Known dispersing machines such as a kneader, a roll mill, an atrider, a super mill, a dissolver, a homomixer, and a sand mill can be used. Further, fine grinding may be performed using frictional force by mechanical grinding described on page 310 of the document.
  • the white inorganic pigment as the white inorganic pigment preferably has an average primary particle diameter of 0.16 ⁇ m to 0.3 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0. A thickness of 18 ⁇ m to 0.27 ⁇ m is preferable. Further, those with 0.19 ⁇ m to 0.25 ⁇ m are particularly preferable.
  • the average particle size of the primary particles is 0.16 ⁇ m or more, the hiding power is high, the base of the light shielding layer becomes difficult to see, and the viscosity is hardly increased.
  • the thickness is 0.3 ⁇ m or less, the whiteness is sufficiently high, the hiding power is high at the same time, and the surface shape when applied is good.
  • the “average particle size of primary particles” as used herein refers to the diameter when the electron micrograph image of the particles is a circle of the same area, and the “number average particle size” refers to the above-mentioned particle size for a large number of particles.
  • the diameter is obtained and the average value of the arbitrary 100 is referred to.
  • laser scattering HORIBA H manufactured by Horiba Advanced Techno Co., Ltd.
  • An antioxidant may be added to the base color layer.
  • an antioxidant a hindered phenol, semi-hindered phenol, phosphoric acid, or a hybrid antioxidant having phosphoric acid / hindered phenol in the molecule can be used.
  • the antioxidant that can be used in the present invention is preferably a phosphoric acid antioxidant, for example, IRGAFOS168 (manufactured by BASF) from the viewpoint of suppressing coloring.
  • Aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene
  • methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, xylene, cyclohexanone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and the like are preferable.
  • a solvent may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • other additives may be used for the base color layer.
  • the other additives include surfactants described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784, paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of JP-A-2009-237362, and Japanese Patent No. 4502784.
  • Examples include the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph [0018], and other additives described in paragraphs [0058] to [0071] of JP-A No. 2000-310706.
  • the surfactant commercially available ones may be used. For example, MegaFuck F553, MegaFuck F554, MegaFuck F556, MegaFuck F557, MegaFuck F559, MegaFuck F561, MegaFuck F-780F (DIC stock) Etc.) can be used.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has a light-shielding layer between the said support body and the said base color layer from a viewpoint of avoiding that a back side is transparent.
  • a light shielding layer when the color of the photosensitive resin layer or the base color layer is not black or gray, it is preferable to provide a light shielding layer.
  • the support and the base color layer of the decorative material-forming laminated material are used. It is preferable to have a light shielding layer in between.
  • the decorative material pattern-containing additive is used. It is preferable to have a light shielding layer between the said support body of the laminated material for decorating material formation, and the said base color layer.
  • a light shielding layer between the support and the base color layer of the other decorative material forming laminate material.
  • the light shielding layer preferably contains a resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain.
  • the light shielding layer may contain other binder resin.
  • Components other than the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the pigment that can be used for the light shielding layer are the same as those that can be used for the base color layer.
  • the ratio of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain with respect to components other than the pigment contained in the light shielding layer is preferably 60% by mass or more, and 70% by mass or more. More preferred.
  • the ratio of the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain with respect to components other than the pigment contained in the base color layer is 90% by mass or more, and with respect to components other than the pigment contained in the light shielding layer
  • the ratio of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain is preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the more preferable range in this case is the same as the more particularly preferable range in the ground color layer or the light shielding layer, and the still more preferable range.
  • Examples of other materials that can be used for the light-shielding layer include materials that can be used for the base color layer. Preferred ranges of other materials are also preferable ranges of materials that can be used for the base color layer. It is the same.
  • the thickness of the light shielding layer is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 5.0 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of enhancing the hiding power of the light shielding layer.
  • the thickness of the light shielding layer is more preferably from 1.0 to 4.0 ⁇ m, particularly preferably from 1.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the base color layer is a metallic gloss layer, and has a transparent adhesive layer on the surface adjacent to the metallic gloss layer and opposite to the support.
  • the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but the transparent adhesive layer preferably has high transparency, and preferably has high adhesiveness with the metallic gloss layer, the photosensitive resin layer, and the white photosensitive resin layer, It is preferable that heat resistance is high.
  • the transparent adhesive layer preferably contains a binder resin. More preferably, the binder resin includes a resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain. However, other binder resins may be included in the transparent adhesive layer as long as not departing from the spirit of the present invention. Examples and preferred ranges of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain that can be used in the transparent adhesive layer are the same as those of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain used in the base color layer.
  • the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain a commercially available resin may be used, and KR251, X40-9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion and processability. KR251 and X40 Two types of mixture of ⁇ 9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) are more preferable.
  • the ratio of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain to the transparent adhesive layer is preferably 60% by mass or more from the viewpoint of obtaining transparency, adhesion to the metallic luster layer, and heat resistance, and is 70% by mass or more. It is more preferable that it is 80 mass% or more, and it is especially preferable that it is 90 mass% or more.
  • the transparent adhesive layer may contain other additives. Examples and preferred ranges of other additives are the same as examples and preferred ranges of other additives used for the base color layer.
  • the transparent adhesive layer preferably contains a surfactant.
  • the surfactant a commercially available one may be used. For example, Megafac F-559 (manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be used.
  • the thickness of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 40 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 30 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 10 to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the other decorative material-forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support may have at least one thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably provided between the support and the base color layer. That is, it is preferable that the said other laminated material for decorating material formation contains the said support body, the said thermoplastic resin layer, and the said base color layer in this order.
  • the component used for the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably an organic polymer substance described in JP-A-5-72724, which is determined by the Vicat method (specifically, the polymer softening point measurement method based on the American Material Test Method ASTM D1235). It is particularly preferable that the softening point is selected from organic polymer materials having a temperature of about 80 ° C. or lower.
  • polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, ethylene copolymers such as ethylene and vinyl acetate or saponified products thereof, ethylene and acrylic acid esters or saponified products thereof, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride and vinyl acetate and saponified products thereof.
  • Vinyl chloride copolymer such as fluoride, polyvinylidene chloride, vinylidene chloride copolymer, polystyrene, styrene copolymer such as styrene and (meth) acrylic acid ester or saponified product thereof, polyvinyl toluene, vinyl toluene and (meta ) Vinyl toluene copolymer such as acrylic ester or saponified product thereof, poly (meth) acrylic ester, (meth) acrylic ester copolymer such as butyl (meth) acrylate and vinyl acetate, vinyl acetate copolymer Combined nylon, copolymer nylon, N-alkoxy Chill nylon, and organic polymeric polyamide resins such as N- dimethylamino nylon.
  • the thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably 6 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 6 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is in the range of 6 to 100 ⁇ m, the unevenness can be completely absorbed even when the substrate has unevenness.
  • the other decorative material forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support in the case of satisfying the condition (N) used in the production method of the present invention is stored at the time of applying a plurality of coating liquids and after coating.
  • at least one intermediate layer may be provided.
  • the intermediate layer is preferably provided between the support and the base color layer (in the case of having the thermoplastic resin layer, between the thermoplastic resin layer and the base color layer). That is, it is preferable that the other decorative material-forming laminated material includes the support, the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer, and the base color layer in this order.
  • an oxygen-blocking film having an oxygen-blocking function described as “separation layer” in JP-A-5-72724 is preferable to use.
  • the oxygen barrier film is preferably formed using a compound that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution, and can be appropriately selected from known compounds. Among these, a combination of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably from 0.1 to 5.0 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.5 to 2.0 ⁇ m. In the range of 0.1 to 5.0 ⁇ m, the oxygen blocking ability does not decrease, and it does not take too much time during development or removal of the intermediate layer.
  • the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material includes the base color layer, the photosensitive resin layer, and the decoration to protect against contamination and damage during storage.
  • a protective release layer (also referred to as a cover film) is preferably provided so as to cover the material pattern.
  • the protective release layer may be made of the same or similar material as the support, but should be easily separated from the base color layer, the photosensitive resin layer, and the decorating material pattern. Suitable materials for the protective release layer include, for example, silicone paper, polyolefin, or polytetrafluoroethylene sheet.
  • the maximum value of the haze degree of the protective release layer is preferably 3.0% or less, and from the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing the occurrence of white spots after development of the white layer, 2.5% or less is preferable. 2.0% or less is more preferable, and 1.0% or less is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the protective release layer is preferably 1 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 50 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 10 to 30 ⁇ m. If the thickness is 1 ⁇ m or more, the strength of the protective release layer is sufficient, so that the protective release layer is not easily broken when a cover film is bonded to the base color layer or the photosensitive resin layer. When the thickness is 100 ⁇ m or less, the price of the protective release layer does not increase, and wrinkles are unlikely to occur when the protective release layer is laminated.
  • Such protective release layers are commercially available, for example, polypropylene films such as Alfane MA-410, E-200C, E-501, Shin-Etsu Film Co., Ltd. manufactured by Oji Paper Co., Ltd., manufactured by Teijin Limited.
  • a polyethylene terephthalate film such as PS series such as PS-25 is exemplified, but not limited thereto. Moreover, it can be easily manufactured by sandblasting a commercially available film.
  • a polyolefin film such as a polyethylene film can be used as the protective release layer.
  • the polyolefin film usually used as the protective release layer is produced by heat-melting raw materials, kneading, extrusion, biaxial stretching, casting or inflation.
  • the laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation which can be used for this invention was demonstrated, the said laminated material for decorating material forming or decorating material pattern containing decorating The material-forming laminated material may be a negative material or a positive material as necessary.
  • the method for producing the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material described above is not particularly limited, but for example, paragraph [0064] of JP-A-2005-3861 To [0066]. Further, the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material can also be prepared by the method described in, for example, JP-A-2009-116072.
  • a known coating method can be used. For example, it can be formed by applying and drying these coating liquids using a coating machine such as a spinner, a wheeler, a roller coater, a curtain coater, a knife coater, a wire bar coater, or an extruder.
  • a coating machine such as a spinner, a wheeler, a roller coater, a curtain coater, a knife coater, a wire bar coater, or an extruder.
  • the method for covering the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern with the protective release layer is not particularly limited, but the protection is applied to the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern on the support.
  • a method in which the release layers are stacked and pressure-bonded can be used.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, or an auto-cut laminator capable of further improving productivity can be used.
  • the pressure bonding conditions are preferably an atmospheric temperature of 20 to 45 ° C. and a linear pressure of 1000 to 10000 N / m.
  • the substrate is made of glass
  • tempered glass obtained by chemical strengthening treatment in which some or all of ions having an ion radius smaller than potassium ions in the glass are replaced with potassium ions is preferable.
  • the glass used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but the strain point temperature obtained by a method according to JIS R3103-2 (2001) is preferably 500 ° C. to 520 ° C. Further, it is preferable that the temperature near the temperature at which glass is likely to be deformed, that is, the temperature of the molten salt is 490 to 530 ° C.
  • the surface of SiO 2 —Na 2 O—K 2 O—CaO—MgO—Al 2 O 3 glass called soda lime glass manufactured by the float process is formed by a chemical strengthening treatment. preferable.
  • the compression layer is formed by immersing glass in a molten salt and exchanging sodium ions in the glass and potassium ions in the molten salt.
  • the compressive layer has a compressive stress value of 200 to 650 MPa, and when the glass is chemically strengthened so as to have the value, the temperature of the molten salt to be immersed is 450 to 550 ° C. and the immersion time. Is preferably 1 hour to 3 hours.
  • the substrate when the substrate is a film substrate include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate (PC), triacetyl cellulose (TAC), and cycloolefin polymer (COP).
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PC polycarbonate
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • COP cycloolefin polymer
  • the substrate is preferably selected from glass, TAC, PET, PC or COP, more preferably made of glass or a cycloolefin polymer, and particularly preferably glass.
  • an antireflection layer an antiglare layer, a retardation layer, a viewing angle improving layer, a scratch resistant layer, a self-healing layer, an antistatic layer, an antifouling layer, an antimagnetic wave layer, and a conductive layer
  • a conductive layer those described in JP-T-2009-505358 can be preferably used.
  • the thickness of the substrate is preferably 40 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 40 to 150 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 50 to 120 ⁇ m.
  • the non-contact surface of the substrate (input of a finger or the like out of the surface of the substrate constituting the capacitive input device) is performed in advance.
  • Surface treatment can be performed on the surface opposite to the surface with which the means is brought into contact.
  • a surface treatment silane coupling treatment
  • silane coupling agent those having a functional group that interacts with the photosensitive resin are preferable.
  • a silane coupling solution N- ⁇ (aminoethyl) ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane 0.3% by mass aqueous solution, trade name: KBM603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • KBM603 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • a heating tank may be used, and the reaction can be promoted by preheating the substrate with a laminator.
  • Lamination (bonding) of the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern to the substrate surface is performed by pressing the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern on the substrate surface, and applying pressure and heating. Is done.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further improve productivity can be used.
  • the laminating method a method in which bubbles do not enter between the decorative material forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminated material and the substrate is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the yield.
  • the use of a vacuum laminator can be preferably mentioned.
  • Examples of the apparatus used for laminating include V-SE340aaH manufactured by Climb Products Co., Ltd.
  • Examples of the vacuum laminator device include those manufactured by Takano Seiki Co., Ltd., Taisei Laminator Co., Ltd., FVJ-540R, FV700, and the like.
  • the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorative material pattern of the support Before sticking the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material to the substrate, the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorative material pattern of the support Including the step of further laminating another support on the opposite side can sometimes provide a preferable effect of preventing bubbles during lamination.
  • a support body used at this time For example, a polyethylene terephthalate, a polycarbonate, a triacetyl cellulose, a cycloolefin polymer is mentioned.
  • the film thickness can be selected in the range of 50 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the production method of the present invention may include a step of removing the support from the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material attached to the substrate. It does not have to be. If the exposure process is not affected and the base material is glass, the decorative material formed on the substrate is formed from the viewpoint of preventing scattering of glass fragments when damaged due to external impact. It is preferable not to include the step of removing the support from the laminated material for decoration or the laminated material for decorating material-containing decorative material formation. On the other hand, when performing the exposure step, the step of removing the support from the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material attached to the substrate as necessary is performed. Also good.
  • the said exposure process is a process of exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorating material formation, or the said photosensitive resin layer laminated
  • a mask for forming a predetermined decorating material pattern is arranged above the photosensitive resin layer formed on the substrate, and then the mask, if necessary, a thermoplastic resin layer and a necessary Accordingly, there is a method of exposing the photosensitive resin layer from above the mask through an intermediate layer.
  • the base color layer, the light shielding layer, and the like may be cured by exposure.
  • the photocurable resin is passed through a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer without using a mask. A method of exposing the entire surface of the layer can be mentioned.
  • the light source for the exposure can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can irradiate light in a wavelength region capable of curing the photosensitive resin layer (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.).
  • a wavelength region capable of curing the photosensitive resin layer for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.
  • an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, etc. are mentioned.
  • the exposure dose is usually about 5 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , preferably about 10 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a colorant that absorbs light in the wavelength range (for example, when a white photosensitive resin layer containing titanium oxide as a white pigment is used)
  • the exposure amount is increased to 100 to 2000 mJ. / Cm 2 , preferably about 300 to 1200 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the developing step is a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer (the base color layer and the light shielding layer as necessary).
  • the developing step is not a developing step in a narrow sense in which the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer is pattern-developed with a developer, but a thermoplastic resin after the entire surface of the base color layer and the light-shielding layer is exposed.
  • This is a development process including a case of a development process in a broad sense in which the base color layer itself and the light shielding layer itself do not form a pattern simply by removing a layer or an intermediate layer.
  • the development can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited, and known developers such as those described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
  • the developer preferably has a development behavior in which the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type.
  • the developer in the case where the base color layer itself or the light shielding layer itself does not form a pattern preferably has a development behavior that does not dissolve the non-alkaline development type composition layer.
  • pKa 7 to Those containing 13 compounds at a concentration of 0.05 to 5 mol / L are preferred.
  • a small amount of an organic solvent miscible with water may be added to the developer.
  • organic solvents miscible with water examples include methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, 1-propanol, butanol, diacetone alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, benzyl alcohol And acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ⁇ -caprolactone, ⁇ -butyrolactone, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, hexamethylphosphoramide, ethyl lactate, methyl lactate, ⁇ -caprolactam, N-methylpyrrolidone and the like.
  • the concentration of the organic solvent is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • a known surfactant can be added to the developer.
  • the concentration of the surfactant is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass.
  • the development method may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower & spin development, dip development and the like.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the uncured portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the photosensitive resin layer after exposure.
  • a thermoplastic resin layer or an intermediate layer is provided, an alkaline solution having a low solubility of the photosensitive resin layer is sprayed by a shower before development, and the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer, etc. are removed. It is preferable to keep it.
  • it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
  • the pH of the developer is preferably 8 to 13.
  • the production method of the present invention may have other steps such as a post-exposure step and a post-bake step.
  • a post-exposure step When the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the light shielding layer are also thermosetting transparent resin layers, it is preferable to perform a post-bake process.
  • the patterning exposure and the entire surface exposure may be performed after the support in the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material is peeled off. You may expose before peeling, and may peel the said support body after that.
  • exposure through a desired mask has been described as an example for forming a decorative material pattern, but the patterning exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • ⁇ Post-bake process> It is preferable to include a post-baking step after the laminating step, and it is more preferable to include a step of performing post-baking after the step of removing the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern makes 0.08 the said base color layer (the light shielding layer as needed) of the said laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation. Forming by heating to 180 to 300 ° C. in an environment of up to 1.2 atm is preferable from the viewpoint of achieving both productivity and reliability when incorporated in an electronic device or the like.
  • the post-baking is more preferably performed in an environment of 0.5 atm or more.
  • the present material is baked in the above pressure range.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of invention and the light shielding layer can be improved (b value is made small), and the whiteness and the color of the board
  • the post-baking temperature is more preferably 200 to 280 ° C., and particularly preferably 220 to 260 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is more preferably 20 to 150 minutes, and particularly preferably 30 to 100 minutes.
  • the post-baking may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment, but it is particularly preferable to perform the post-bake from the viewpoint of reducing the manufacturing cost without using a special decompression device.
  • the manufacturing method of this invention may have other processes, such as a post-exposure process.
  • the base color layer and the light shielding layer preferably include a post-exposure step.
  • the post-exposure step may be performed only from the surface of the base color layer and the light-shielding layer that is in contact with the substrate, from only the surface that is not in contact with the transparent substrate, or from both surfaces. Good.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention was manufactured by the manufacturing method of the board
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention is demonstrated.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has a decorating material pattern and a base color layer in this order on a board
  • the decorating material pattern and the base color layer may be laminated in direct contact with each other, or may be laminated through other layers, but when forming the decorating material pattern, a photosensitivity other than white is used.
  • a conductive resin layer it is preferable that the layers are laminated in direct contact.
  • the base color layer is a metallic luster layer
  • the decorating material pattern and the base color layer that is, the metallic luster layer
  • the layers are laminated via the transparent adhesive layer.
  • the optical density may be low.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention light leakage etc. are suppressed by setting it as the structure containing the decorating material pattern, the base color layer which is a white layer, and the light shielding layer in this order from the board
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has a highly accurate decorating material pattern.
  • the pattern line width is preferably 150 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, particularly preferably 50 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 20 ⁇ m or less. Even more preferably, it is 15 ⁇ m or less.
  • the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention is preferably used for the back exterior of electronic devices such as mobile phones and smartphones and information display devices, and particularly for electronic devices such as mobile phones and smartphones and information display devices having a touch panel. More preferably, it is used for the back exterior.
  • a capacitive input device is preferable.
  • the capacitance type input device and the image display device including the capacitance type input device as a component are “latest touch panel technology” (Techno Times, issued on July 6, 2009), supervised by Yuji Mitani.
  • the configurations disclosed in “Technology and Development of Touch Panels”, CMC Publishing (2004, 12), FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 Lecture Textbook, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Application Note AN2292, and the like can be applied.
  • the information display device that can use the touch panel is preferably a mobile device, and examples thereof include the following information display devices.
  • iPhone4, iPad above made by Apple Inc., USA
  • Xperia SO-01B
  • Galaxy S SC-02B
  • Galaxy Tab SC-01C
  • BlackBerry 8707h manufactured by Kankoku Research in Motion
  • Kindle manufactured by Amazon, USA
  • Kobo Touch manufactured by Rakuten, Inc.
  • White coloring liquid 2 was prepared using the following materials.
  • White colored liquid 2 prescription
  • White pigment dispersion FP WHITE B422, Sanyo Dye Co., Ltd., the following composition
  • 16.7 parts by mass-White pigment titanium dioxide
  • 70.0% by mass -Dispersing aid 3.5% by weight -Dispersion solvent (methyl ethyl ketone) 26.5% by weight ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 2.06 parts by mass ⁇ Silicone resin solution 3 (KR251, Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., solid resin 20 mass% toluene solution) 78.8 parts by mass ⁇ Silicone resin solution 4
  • X40-9246 Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., silicone oligomer
  • 1.75 parts by mass D-15 Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd. (silicone resin catalyst, zinc-containing catalyst xylene solution (solid content 50 mass%)) 0.700 parts by
  • a dispersion for green (G) (G-1) was prepared according to the following formulation.
  • Pigment Green 36 (average particle size 47 nm in SEM observation)
  • Pigment Yellow 150 (average particle size 39 nm in SEM observation) 7 parts
  • Solvent 70 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • a green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating liquid CG-1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
  • -Green (G) dispersion (G-1) 100 parts-Epoxy resin: 2 parts (trade name EHPE3150 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries)-Polymerizable compound: Dipentaerythritol penta-hexaacrylate 8 parts-Polymerizable compound: Tetra (ethoxy acrylate) 2 parts of pentaerythritol, polymerization initiator: 1,3-bistrihalomethyl-5-benzooxolantolyazine 2 parts, polymerization initiator: 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4- Morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1 1 part ⁇ Polymerization initiator: diethylthioxanthone 0.5 part ⁇ Polymerization inhibitor: 0.001 part of p-methoxyphenol ⁇ Fluorosurfact
  • Dispersing Resin A-3 (polystyrene equivalent weight average molecular weight 24000) ( Dispersion resin 30 mass%, propylene glycol monomethyl ether 21 mass%, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 49 mass%) was obtained.
  • the acid value of this dispersion resin A-3 was 48 mg / g.
  • the structure of Dispersing Resin A-3 is shown below.
  • thermoplastic resin layer A coating solution for a thermoplastic resin layer was prepared.
  • Monomer 1 (trade name: BPE-500, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.): 9.1 mass Part / coating aid: 0.54 parts by mass
  • 120 ° C. after removing the solvent from the coating liquid H1 for the thermoplastic resin layer The viscosity was 1500Pa ⁇ sec.
  • a coating solution for a transparent adhesive layer was prepared.
  • a coating liquid for white photosensitive resin layer was prepared.
  • (Coating liquid for white photosensitive resin layer: prescription) -White pigment dispersion (FP WHITE B422, Sanyo dye Co., Ltd., the following composition) 11.2 parts by mass-White pigment (titanium dioxide) 70.0% by mass -Dispersing aid 3.5% by weight -Dispersion solvent (methyl ethyl ketone) 26.5% by weight ⁇ Methyl ethyl ketone 46.6 mass parts ⁇ Alkali soluble acrylic resin (Alloset CF100, Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.) 31.4 parts by mass dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (DPHA) (solid content 76% by mass, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution) 10.0 parts by mass-Irgacure 907 (manufactured by BASF) 0.640 parts by mass-Megafac F559 (manufactured by Dainippon In
  • thermoplastic resin layer is coated with the coating solution for the thermoplastic resin layer prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 15.0 ⁇ m, and then at 120 ° C. for 3 minutes. Formed by drying.
  • the intermediate layer is prepared by applying the intermediate layer coating solution prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 1.8 ⁇ m, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. Formed.
  • the photosensitive resin layer was coated with the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 ⁇ m. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes. A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 ⁇ m was pressure-bonded onto the prepared photosensitive resin layer to obtain a laminated material (A-1) for decorating material formation.
  • a light-shielding layer and a base color layer (white layer) were laminated in this order on the release layer of Support A (Unitika Ltd. PET film with release layer Unipeel TR-6 75 ⁇ m).
  • the light-shielding layer is formed by applying the black colored liquid 1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 2.0 ⁇ m, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. did.
  • the white colored liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 20 ⁇ m, and then dried under conditions of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. Was formed.
  • a polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 ⁇ m was pressure-bonded onto the produced base color layer (white layer) to obtain a decorative material-forming laminate material (B).
  • the support B, the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer are formed on a glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm ⁇ 400 mm ⁇ 0.7 mm) using the decorative material-forming laminate material (A-1) from which the cover film is peeled off.
  • the resin layer is laminated with the surface of the photosensitive resin layer facing the surface of the glass substrate, under conditions of a substrate temperature of 100 ° C., an upper roll temperature of 100 ° C., a lower roll temperature of 100 ° C., and a conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min. And laminated together. After the lamination, the support B of the decorative material-forming laminated material (A-1) was removed.
  • triethanolamine developer (containing 30% by mass of triethanolamine, trade name: T-PD2 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) 12 times with pure water (1 part of T-PD2 and 11 parts of pure water)
  • T-PD2 manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation
  • pure water 1 part of T-PD2 and 11 parts of pure water
  • the glass substrate after exposure was shower-developed at 30 ° C. for 20 seconds at a flat nozzle pressure of 0.1 MPa to remove the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • pure water was sprayed for 10 seconds by a shower, pure water shower cleaning was performed, and air was blown to reduce a liquid pool on the substrate.
  • a sodium carbonate / sodium hydrogen carbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) is diluted 5 times with pure water (mixed with 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water).
  • the shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted solution), and the washed glass substrate was developed for 30 seconds. Subsequently, the glass substrate after development was washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer was removed, thereby forming a decorative material pattern on the glass substrate by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the decorative material-forming laminated material (B) (other decorative material-forming laminated material) with the cover film peeled off
  • the surface temperature of the base color layer side (white layer side) and the surface of the decorative material pattern surface side are made to face each other, and the light shielding layer, base color layer (white layer), and support A are collectively measured at the substrate temperature.
  • the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorating material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Example 1 was produced. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
  • Example 2 ⁇ Preparation of laminated material for decorating material formation (A-2)> A photosensitive resin layer was formed on the release layer of the support A. The photosensitive resin layer was coated with the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 ⁇ m. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes. A 12 ⁇ m-thick polypropylene cover film was pressure-bonded onto the produced photosensitive resin layer to obtain a decorative material-forming laminate material (A-2).
  • G green photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 ⁇ m. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes. A 12 ⁇ m-thick polypropylene cover film was pressure-bonded onto the produced photosensitive resin layer to obtain a decorative material-forming laminate material (A-2).
  • a sodium carbonate / sodium hydrogen carbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) was diluted 5 times with pure water (mixed in a ratio of 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water).
  • the substrate temperature was 100 ° C.
  • the upper roll temperature was 100 ° C.
  • the lower roll temperature was 100 ° C.
  • the conveyance speed was 0.6 m / min, and the decorative material pattern and the support A were laminated on the glass substrate. After the lamination, the support A was peeled off.
  • a base color layer (white layer) The surface on the side faces the surface of the decorative material pattern, and the substrate layer temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 ° C., and the lower roll temperature is 100 ° C. for the light shielding layer, the base color layer (white layer) and the support A.
  • the laminate was laminated under the condition of a conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min, and a decorative material pattern, a base color layer (white layer), a light shielding layer and a support A were laminated in this order on a glass substrate.
  • the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorating material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, thereby producing the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Example 2. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
  • Example 3 ⁇ Production of decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -1 of Example 3>
  • a base color layer (white layer) and a photosensitive resin layer were laminated in this order.
  • the white colored liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 20 ⁇ m, and then dried under conditions of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. Was formed.
  • the photosensitive resin layer was coated with the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 ⁇ m. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes.
  • a polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 ⁇ m was pressure-bonded onto the prepared photosensitive resin layer to obtain a laminated material (i) -1 for decorating material formation of Example 3.
  • the shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted liquid), and the exposed decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -1 was developed for 30 seconds.
  • the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -1 after development is washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -1.
  • a decorative material pattern was formed to obtain a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminate material of Example 3.
  • the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -1 of Example 3 in which a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer was formed that is, the decorative material pattern-containing additive of Example 3.
  • the surface of the decorative material pattern side of the laminated material for decorating material is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm ⁇ 400 mm ⁇ 0.7 mm), the substrate temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 ° C., and the lower roll is used.
  • a decorative material pattern a base color layer (white layer) and a support A were laminated in this order on the glass substrate.
  • the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorative material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorative material pattern of Example 3 was produced. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
  • Example 4 ⁇ Preparation of decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -2 of Example 4>
  • a light shielding layer On the release layer of the support A, a light shielding layer, a base color layer (white layer), and a photosensitive resin layer were laminated in this order.
  • the light-shielding layer is formed by applying the black colored liquid 1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 2.0 ⁇ m, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. did.
  • the white colored liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 20 ⁇ m, and then dried under conditions of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. Was formed.
  • the photosensitive resin layer was coated with a green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 ⁇ m, and then at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. It was formed by drying under the conditions of A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 ⁇ m was pressure-bonded onto the prepared photosensitive resin layer to obtain a laminate material (i) -2 for decorating material formation of Example 4.
  • G green
  • the shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted solution), and the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -2 after development was developed for 30 seconds.
  • the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -2 after development is washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -2.
  • a decorative material pattern was formed, and a decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material of Example 4 was obtained.
  • the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -2 of Example 4 in which the decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer was formed that is, the decorative material pattern-containing additive of Example 4.
  • the surface of the decorative material pattern side of the laminated material for decorating material is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm ⁇ 400 mm ⁇ 0.7 mm), the substrate temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 ° C., and the lower roll is used.
  • a decorative material pattern a base color layer (white layer) light-shielding layer and a support A were laminated in this order on the glass substrate.
  • the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorating material pattern or the like was formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Example 4 was produced. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
  • the exposed decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -3 was developed at 29 ° C. for 180 seconds.
  • the laminated material for forming a decorative material (i) -3 after development is washed with pure water, and the (white) photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the laminated material for forming a decorative material (i-3).
  • the decorative material pattern formed was formed, and the (white) decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material of Example 5 was obtained.
  • the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -3 of Example 5 in which a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the (white) photosensitive resin layer was formed (that is, the decorative material of Example 5)
  • the surface of the decorative material pattern side of the laminate material for pattern-containing decorative material formation) is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm ⁇ 400 mm ⁇ 0.7 mm)
  • the substrate temperature is 100 ° C.
  • the upper roll temperature is 100 (White) decorative material pattern (layer formed by exposing and developing a white photosensitive resin layer) on a glass substrate by laminating under the conditions of °C
  • lower roll temperature of 100 °C and conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min
  • a transparent adhesive layer, a base color layer (aluminum vapor deposition layer), and a PET base (support C) were laminated in this order.
  • the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorative material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorative material pattern of Example 5 was produced. At that time, the PET base of the support C was left without peeling.
  • the black colored liquid 1 prepared above was applied onto the base color layer (white layer) using a screen printer so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 ⁇ m, and then 120 ° C. 2 A light-shielding layer was formed by drying under conditions of minutes.
  • stacked in this order on the glass substrate was produced.
  • Example 5 a laminated material G for decorating material formation was used in the same manner as in Example 5 except that instead of the support C, a support D (25 ⁇ m PET base having no aluminum vapor deposition layer (that is, a base color layer)) was used. Next, a substrate with a (white) decorative material pattern of Reference Example 1 was produced in the same manner as in Example 5.
  • Reference example 1 is a reference example for clarifying the hiding power of the white layer when the metallic gloss layer is combined.
  • ⁇ Evaluation of hiding power of white decorative material pattern The hiding power of the white decorative material pattern of the substrate with the decorative material pattern obtained in Example 5 and Reference Example 1 was laid out by placing black paper and white paper under the decorative material pattern substrate without gaps. The degree to which the boundary portion between the black paper and the white paper was seen through the decorating material was sensory evaluated. A: The border between black paper and white paper cannot be seen through. B: The border between black paper and white paper can be seen through.
  • substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention exposes and develops a decorating material pattern (white photosensitive resin layer). It was found that there was little variation in the film thickness of the layer) and the base color layer, and a highly accurate decorative material pattern was provided. More specifically, in the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of Examples 1 to 4 and 11 to 14, since it can be continuously and stably applied in a film state by a die coater, there is little variation in film thickness. A substrate with a decorative material pattern could be produced.
  • the substrates with decorating material patterns of Examples 1 to 5 and 11 to 14 use a tempered glass substrate as the substrate.
  • PET that is a support (film) of the laminated material for decorating material formation is a substrate with a decorating material pattern. Therefore, even if the glass substrate breaks due to falling, the broken glass is not scattered and excellent in safety.
  • the decorative material-patterned substrate using the tempered glass substrate of Comparative Example 1 was inferior in safety because the broken glass was scattered.
  • the thickness of the white photosensitive resin layer is 4 It was found that the hiding power and whiteness were high even at .5 ⁇ m. High whiteness is determined by L * being high and a * and b * being low. On the other hand, it was found that the decorative material-patterned substrate of Reference Example 1 provided with a 4.5 ⁇ m white photosensitive resin layer without a metallic luster layer (underlying color layer) has low hiding power and whiteness.

Abstract

This method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern comprises: a step for forming a decorative material pattern by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer of a multilayer material for decorative material formation, which has the photosensitive resin layer on a supporting body, and a step for laminating the thus-formed decorative material pattern on a substrate; a step for laminating a photosensitive resin layer of a multilayer material for decorative material formation, which has the photosensitive resin layer on a supporting body, and a step for forming a decorative material pattern by exposing and developing the thus-laminated photosensitive resin layer; or a step for laminating a decorative material pattern of a decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation on a substrate, said decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation having a decorative material pattern, which is obtained by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer, on a supporting body. In addition, this method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern satisfies the following condition (M) or condition (N). Condition (M): A base color layer is arranged between the supporting body and the photosensitive resin layer of the multilayer material for decorative material formation, or between the supporting body and the decorative material pattern of the decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation. Condition (N): The method comprises a step for laminating a base color layer of another multilayer material for decorative material formation, which has the base color layer on a supporting body, on the decorative material pattern.

Description

加飾材パターン付き基板およびその製造方法、加飾材形成用積層材料ならびに加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料Substrate with decorating material pattern and manufacturing method thereof, laminating material for decorating material formation, and laminating material for decorating material containing decorating material pattern
 本発明は、加飾材パターン付き基板およびその製造方法、加飾材形成用積層材料ならびに加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料に関する。 The present invention relates to a substrate with a decorative material pattern, a method for producing the same, a laminated material for forming a decorative material, and a laminated material for forming a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material.
 携帯電話機、スマートフォン等の電子機器における外装は、前面外装と背面外装を組み合わせて構成されたものが一般的である。近年、電子機器のファッション化に伴い、印刷にて縁取りや文字やロゴマークなどの等の加飾材パターンが形成されて、加飾が施されるようになってきている。このような加飾材パターンは通常、加飾材パターンと、その加飾材パターンの発色や視認性などを高めるための下地色層の積層体として設けられる。 The exterior of electronic devices such as mobile phones and smartphones is generally configured by combining a front exterior and a rear exterior. In recent years, with the trend toward fashion of electronic devices, decorative material patterns such as borders, letters, logo marks, and the like are formed by printing, and decoration has been applied. Such a decorating material pattern is usually provided as a laminate of a decorating material pattern and a base color layer for enhancing the coloring and visibility of the decorating material pattern.
 また、液晶装置などの前面にタッチパネル型の入力装置が配置され、液晶装置の画像表示領域に表示された指示画像を参照しながらこの指示画像が表示されている箇所に指またはタッチペンなどを触れることで指示画像に対応する情報の入力が行えるタッチパネルが用いられるようになってきている。 In addition, a touch panel type input device is arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal device or the like, and a finger or a touch pen is touched on the position where the instruction image is displayed while referring to the instruction image displayed in the image display area of the liquid crystal device. The touch panel that can input information corresponding to the instruction image has been used.
 タッチパネルの外装への加飾を施した例として、前面外装に加飾を施す方法が知られている。例えば特許文献1には、透明板からなる保護パネル本体と、透明樹脂フィルムの上面に矩形の下部透明電極と当該下部透明電極の周囲に設けられた下部回路とを有し、前記保護パネル本体の上面に貼り合わされた下部電極シートと、透明樹脂フィルムの下面に矩形の上部透明電極と当該上部透明電極の周囲に設けられた上部回路とを有し、前記下部電極シートと電極間に間隙を形成して接着された上部電極シートと、透明樹脂フィルムの少なくとも一方の面に前記下部回路及び前記上部回路を隠蔽して透明窓部を形成する加飾層を有し、前記上部電極シートの上面に貼り合わされた加飾シートと、前記上部電極シートと前記下部電極シートとを接着し、これらの外周に沿って設けられた枠状部と当該枠状部の内側に前記透明窓部を避け且つ前記回路部分にも及んで分散配置された多数の島状部とからなる糊層と、を備えた電子機器表窓のタッチ入力機能付き保護パネルが記載されている。特許文献1では、あらかじめ支持体上に印刷方式によりパターン形成した印刷層または印刷層と金属薄膜層の組合せを有する加飾フィルムを、感圧接着剤(以下、PSAとも言う)を用いて基板上に貼り合わせ加飾基板を製造している。なお、特許文献1には島状部の糊層を黒色のドット状や筋状の遮光層とすることも記載されている。 As an example of decorating the exterior of the touch panel, a method of decorating the front exterior is known. For example, Patent Document 1 includes a protective panel body made of a transparent plate, a rectangular lower transparent electrode on the upper surface of the transparent resin film, and a lower circuit provided around the lower transparent electrode, A lower electrode sheet bonded to the upper surface, a rectangular upper transparent electrode on the lower surface of the transparent resin film, and an upper circuit provided around the upper transparent electrode, and a gap is formed between the lower electrode sheet and the electrode An upper electrode sheet bonded to the transparent resin film, and a decorative layer for concealing the lower circuit and the upper circuit to form a transparent window on at least one surface of the transparent resin film, and on the upper surface of the upper electrode sheet Adhering the laminated decorative sheet, the upper electrode sheet and the lower electrode sheet, avoiding the transparent window portion inside the frame-shaped portion and the frame-shaped portion provided along the outer periphery of the frame-shaped portion and the front A glue layer made of a plurality of islands which are distributed extends to the circuit portion, the protection panel with a touch input function for electronic instrument table window having a listed. In Patent Document 1, a decorative film having a printed layer or a combination of a printed layer and a metal thin film layer previously patterned by a printing method on a support is applied to a substrate using a pressure-sensitive adhesive (hereinafter also referred to as PSA). To manufacture decorative substrates. Patent Document 1 also describes that the glue layer of the island-shaped portion is a black dot-shaped or streak-shaped light shielding layer.
 一方、タッチパネルとは反対側の面(背面外装)に加飾材パターンが形成されて、加飾が行われた例も知られている。例えば特許文献2には、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムまたはアクリルフィルムで形成された基材フィルムの面上に、パール顔料などを含む光輝層、オフセット印刷によって積層されているパターン層、隠蔽層が積層されて形成された加飾フィルムが開示されており、小ロット及び短納期で商業生産することが可能であるとともに、階調表現が求められる意匠を付与した加飾フィルム及び加飾成形品を提供できることが記載されている。 On the other hand, there is also known an example in which a decoration material pattern is formed on the surface (rear exterior) opposite to the touch panel and decoration is performed. For example, Patent Document 2 is formed by laminating a glitter layer containing a pearl pigment, a pattern layer laminated by offset printing, and a concealing layer on the surface of a base film formed of a polyethylene terephthalate film or an acrylic film. The disclosed decorative film is disclosed, and can be produced in a small lot and in a short delivery time, and can provide a decorative film and a decorative molded product with a design that requires gradation expression. Has been.
特開2011-8448号公報JP 2011-8448 A 特開2012-201006号公報JP 2012-201006 A
 特許文献1や2に記載されるような従来の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、インクを用いて基板に印刷を行う方式が主流であった。しかしながら、本発明者が加飾材パターン付き基板を、印刷により形成したところ、印刷により形成される層の厚みの均一性やパターン上の印刷を行う際のパターン精度に改善の必要があることがわかった。
 また、基板への印刷では枚葉となった一枚一枚の基板に何層もの塗布を行わなければならず非効率であり、改善の必要があることがわかった。
 さらに、あらかじめ支持体上に印刷方式によりパターン形成した加飾フィルムを、PSAを用いて基板上に貼り合わせ加飾材パターン付き基板を作成する特許文献1の方式は、PSA層の形成が必要であるなど工程が複雑で改善の必要性があることがわかった。
In the conventional method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorative material pattern as described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, a method of printing on a substrate using ink has been mainstream. However, when the present inventor formed a substrate with a decorative material pattern by printing, it is necessary to improve the uniformity of the thickness of the layer formed by printing and the pattern accuracy when printing on the pattern. all right.
In addition, it has been found that in printing on a substrate, multiple layers of coating must be applied to each single substrate, which is inefficient and needs to be improved.
Furthermore, the method of Patent Document 1 that creates a substrate with a decorative material pattern by pasting a decorative film previously patterned on a support by a printing method onto a substrate using PSA requires formation of a PSA layer. It was found that the process was complicated and there was a need for improvement.
 本発明が解決しようとする課題は、工程が単純であり、製造コストが低く、下地色層の膜厚のバラツキが少なく、高精度な加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法を提供することである。 The problem to be solved by the present invention is a method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern that has a simple process, low production cost, little variation in the thickness of the base color layer, and a highly accurate decorating material pattern. Is to provide.
 本発明者らは、前記課題を解決するために鋭意研究を重ねた結果、基板上に加飾材パターンと下地色層をこの順で有する加飾材パターン付き基板を製造する方法として、加飾材パターンをフォトリソグラフィーの手法で露光および現像して形成し、かつ、加飾材パターンや下地色層を支持体上に感光性樹脂層、下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンのうち少なくとも1層を設けた加飾材形成用積層材料を用いて積層することで、工程が単純であり、製造コストが低く、下地色層の膜厚のバラツキが少なく、高精度な加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法を提供できることを見出した。
 すなわち、以下に示す構成の本発明により、前記課題が解決できることを見出し、本発明の完成に至った。
As a result of intensive research in order to solve the above problems, the inventors have made a decoration as a method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern having a decorative material pattern and a base color layer in this order on the substrate. The material pattern is formed by exposure and development using a photolithography technique, and the decorative material pattern and the base color layer are exposed and developed on the support with the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive resin layer being exposed and developed. By laminating using a decorative material forming laminated material provided with at least one layer among the decorative material patterns to be manufactured, the process is simple, the manufacturing cost is low, and the film thickness variation of the base color layer is small, It discovered that the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern which has a highly accurate decorating material pattern can be provided.
That is, it has been found that the above-described problems can be solved by the present invention having the following configuration, and the present invention has been completed.
[1] 支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程、及び、形成された加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の感光性樹脂層を基板に積層する工程、及び、積層された感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程;または、
 支持体上に、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;のいずれかの工程を含み、
 下記条件(M)または条件(N)を満たす加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。
条件(M):加飾材形成用積層材料の支持体と感光性樹脂層との間、または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記支持体と加飾材パターンとの間に、下地色層を有する。
条件(N):支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の下地色層を加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含む。前記加飾材形成用積層材料は、前記支持体と前記感光性樹脂層または前記加飾材パターンとの間に下地色層を有さない。
[2] [1]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、条件(M)を満たし、
 支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料(i)の感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
 露光された感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンが形成された加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)を調製する工程と、
 加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を、基板に加飾材パターン側を対向させた状態で当該基板に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
[3] [1]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、条件(M)を満たし、
 支持体上に下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)を、基板に加飾材パターン側を対向させた状態で当該基板に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
[4] [1]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、条件(N)を満たし、
 支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料(A)の感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
 露光された感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、
 加飾材形成用積層材料(A)の加飾材パターンを基板上に積層する工程と、
 支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の下地色層を加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
[5] [1]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、条件(N)を満たし、
 支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料(A)の感光性樹脂層を基板上に積層する工程と、
 支持体を感光性樹脂層から剥離する工程と、
 感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
 露光された感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、
 支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の下地色層を加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
[6] [1]~[5]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、支持体と下地色層の間に遮光層を有し、下地色層および遮光層を一括して基板上に積層することが好ましい。
[7] [1]~[6]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、下地色層が白色層であることが好ましい。
[8] [2]または[3]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、下地色層が金属光沢層であることが好ましい。
[9] [8]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、金属光沢層に隣接して、かつ支持体とは反対側の表面に透明接着層を有することが好ましい。
[10] [8]または[9]に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、金属光沢層が金属薄膜層であることが好ましい。
[11] [1]~[10]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、感光性樹脂層が光重合開始剤およびエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
[12] [1]~[11]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、感光性樹脂層が染料または顔料を含むことが好ましい。
[13] [1]~[12]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法により製造された加飾材パターン付き基板。
[14] 支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料。
[15] [14]に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料は、支持体と下地色層の間に遮光層を有することが好ましい。
[16] [14]または[15]に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料は、下地色層が白色層であることを特徴とすることが好ましい。
[17] [16]に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料は、下地色層が金属光沢層であり、金属光沢層に隣接して、かつ支持体とは反対側の表面に透明接着層を有することが好ましい。
[18] [16]または[17]に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料は、金属光沢層が金属薄膜層であることが好ましい。
[19] [14]~[18]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材形成用積層材料は、感光性樹脂層が光重合開始剤およびエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
[20] [14]~[19]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材形成用積層材料は、感光性樹脂層が染料または顔料を含むことが好ましい。
[21] [14]~[20]のいずれか一つに記載の加飾材形成用積層材料の感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料。
[1] A process of forming a decorative material pattern by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer of a decorative material-forming laminated material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support, and the formed decorative material pattern A step of laminating on a substrate; a step of laminating a photosensitive resin layer of a decorative material forming laminate material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support on a substrate; and exposing and developing the laminated photosensitive resin layer Forming a decorating material pattern; or
Any one of the processes of laminating | stacking the decorating material pattern of the decorating material pattern containing laminated material for decorating material pattern containing the decorating material pattern in which the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on a support body on a board | substrate. Including steps,
The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern which satisfy | fills the following conditions (M) or conditions (N).
Condition (M): Between the support of the laminate material for decorating material formation and the photosensitive resin layer, or between the support of the laminate material for decorating material pattern-containing decorating material and the decorating material pattern. And a base color layer.
Condition (N): including a step of laminating a base color layer of another decorating material forming laminate material having a base color layer on the support on the decorating material pattern. The laminated material for decorating material does not have a base color layer between the support and the photosensitive resin layer or the decorating material pattern.
[2] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (M),
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support;
Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to prepare a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) in which a decorative material pattern is formed; and
It is preferable to include the process of laminating | stacking the decorating material pattern containing laminated material for decorating material formation on the said board | substrate in the state which made the decorating material pattern side face the board | substrate.
[3] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (M),
A decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer on a support in this order, and a decorative material pattern on the substrate It is preferable to include a step of laminating the substrate with the sides facing each other.
[4] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (N),
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material (A) having a photosensitive resin layer on a support;
Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and
A step of laminating the decorative material pattern of the decorative material forming laminate material (A) on the substrate;
It is preferable to include the process of laminating | stacking the base color layer of the other laminated material for decorating material formation which has a base color layer on a support body on a decorating material pattern.
[5] The method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [1] satisfies the condition (N),
Laminating the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material forming laminate material (A) having a photosensitive resin layer on the support on the substrate;
Peeling the support from the photosensitive resin layer;
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer;
Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and
It is preferable to include the process of laminating | stacking the base color layer of the other laminated material for decorating material formation which has a base color layer on a support body on a decorating material pattern.
[6] The method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of [1] to [5] has a light shielding layer between a support and a base color layer, and the base color layer and the light shield layer Are preferably laminated on the substrate in a lump.
[7] In the method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of [1] to [6], the base color layer is preferably a white layer.
[8] In the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [2] or [3], the base color layer is preferably a metallic luster layer.
[9] The method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [8] preferably has a transparent adhesive layer on the surface adjacent to the metallic luster layer and opposite to the support.
[10] In the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to [8] or [9], the metallic gloss layer is preferably a metal thin film layer.
[11] In the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of [1] to [10], the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
[12] In the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of [1] to [11], the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a dye or a pigment.
[13] A substrate with a decorative material pattern manufactured by the method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorative material pattern according to any one of [1] to [12].
[14] A decorative material-forming laminate material having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support.
[15] The decorative material forming laminate material according to [14] preferably has a light shielding layer between the support and the base color layer.
[16] In the decorative material-forming laminated material according to [14] or [15], the base color layer is preferably a white layer.
[17] In the decorative material-forming laminate material according to [16], the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, and a transparent adhesive layer is provided adjacent to the metallic luster layer and on the surface opposite to the support. It is preferable to have.
[18] In the decorative material forming laminate material according to [16] or [17], the metallic luster layer is preferably a metal thin film layer.
[19] In the decorative material-forming laminated material according to any one of [14] to [18], the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
[20] In the decorative material-forming laminated material according to any one of [14] to [19], the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a dye or a pigment.
[21] A decorative material pattern-containing decoration having a decorative material pattern in which the photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for forming a decorative material according to any one of [14] to [20] is exposed and developed. Laminate material for material formation.
 本発明によれば、工程が単純であり、製造コストが低く、下地色層の膜厚のバラツキが少なく、高精度な加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, there is provided a method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern that has a simple process, low manufacturing cost, little variation in film thickness of a base color layer, and a highly accurate decorating material pattern. Can do.
 以下、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板およびその製造方法、加飾材形成用積層材料ならびに加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料について詳細に説明する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。なお、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
Hereinafter, the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, its manufacturing method, the laminated material for decorating material formation, and the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation are demonstrated in detail.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments. In the present specification, a numerical range represented by using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
[加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法]
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法(以下、本発明の製造方法とも言う)は、支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程、及び、形成された加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の感光性樹脂層を基板に積層する工程、及び、積層された感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程;または、
 支持体上に感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;を含み、
 下記条件(M)または条件(N)を満たすことを特徴とする。
条件(M):前記加飾材形成用積層材料が前記支持体と前記感光性樹脂層または前記加飾材パターンとの間に下地色層を有する。
条件(N):支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含む。なお、前記加飾材形成用積層材料は、前記支持体と前記感光性樹脂層または前記加飾材パターンとの間に下地色層を有さない。
 このような構成により、本発明の製造方法は、工程が単純であり、製造コストが低く、下地色層の膜厚のバラツキが少なく、高精度な加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン付き基板を製造できる。本発明の製造方法では、フォトリソグラフィーによる高精度なパターン形成と膜厚均一性の高さを活かすとともに、フォトリソグラフィーを行う層やそれ以外の下地色層を一度又は少ない回数で積層して加飾材パターン付き基板を製造することができる。これらのことは、特開2011-8448号公報や特開2012-201006号公報などを含む先行技術文献に示唆されていなかった。
 また、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、下地色層の膜厚のバラツキが小さい。下地色層の膜厚のバラツキは±3%以内であることが好ましく、±2%以内であることがより好ましく、±1%以内であることが特に好ましく、±0.7%以内であることがより特に好ましい。
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法の詳細および好ましい態様について説明する。
[Method of manufacturing substrate with decorative material pattern]
The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention (henceforth the manufacturing method of this invention) exposes the said photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorating material formation which has a photosensitive resin layer on a support body. And a step of forming a decorative material pattern by developing, and a step of laminating the formed decorative material pattern on a substrate; a photosensitive resin of a laminated material for forming a decorative material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support A step of laminating a layer on a substrate, and a step of exposing and developing the laminated photosensitive resin layer to form a decorating material pattern; or
Laminating the decorative material pattern of a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer on a support to a substrate;
The following condition (M) or condition (N) is satisfied.
Condition (M): The laminate material for decorating material formation has a base color layer between the support and the photosensitive resin layer or the decorating material pattern.
Condition (N): including a step of laminating the base color layer of another decorating material forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support on the decorating material pattern. In addition, the said lamination material for decorating material formation does not have a base color layer between the said support body and the said photosensitive resin layer or the said decorating material pattern.
With such a configuration, the manufacturing method of the present invention has a simple process, low manufacturing cost, little variation in the thickness of the base color layer, and a substrate with a decorative material pattern having a highly accurate decorative material pattern. Can be manufactured. In the production method of the present invention, high-precision pattern formation by photolithography and high film thickness uniformity are utilized, and a layer for performing photolithography and other underlying color layers are laminated once or a small number of times for decoration. A substrate with a material pattern can be manufactured. These have not been suggested in prior art documents including Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication Nos. 2011-8448 and 2012-201006.
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has small variation in the film thickness of a base color layer. The film thickness variation of the base color layer is preferably within ± 3%, more preferably within ± 2%, particularly preferably within ± 1%, and within ± 0.7%. Is more particularly preferred.
The details and preferred embodiments of the method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention will be described.
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程、及び、形成された加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の感光性樹脂層を基板に積層する工程、及び、積層された感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程;または、
 支持体上に感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;を含む。
 すなわち、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、
基板上に積層された感光性樹脂層へのフォトリソグラフィーにより加飾材パターンを形成する工程を含んでもよいし;支持体上の感光性樹脂層へのフォトリソグラフィーによりあらかじめ形成された加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を用いてもよい。
The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention forms the decorating material pattern by exposing and developing the said photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorating material formation which has a photosensitive resin layer on a support body. A step of laminating the formed decorative material pattern on the substrate; a step of laminating the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material forming laminated material having the photosensitive resin layer on the support; and laminating Exposing and developing the formed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; or
A step of laminating the decorative material pattern of the decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material pattern having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a photosensitive resin layer on a support on a substrate.
That is, the manufacturing method of the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention is:
A step of forming a decorating material pattern by photolithography on the photosensitive resin layer laminated on the substrate; or a decorating material pattern previously formed by photolithography on the photosensitive resin layer on the support. A decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material may be used.
<具体的態様>
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、具体的には以下の第一の態様、第二の態様、第三の態様および第四の態様のいずれかであることが好ましい。
<Specific embodiment>
Specifically, the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention is preferably any one of the following first aspect, second aspect, third aspect and fourth aspect.
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法の第一の態様では、前記条件(M)を満たし、
 支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料(i)の前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
 露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンが形成された加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)(以下、「加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)」とも言う。)を調製する工程と、
 前記加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を、基板に前記加飾材パターン側を対向させた状態で当該基板に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
In the 1st aspect of the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, the said conditions (M) are satisfy | filled,
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support;
The exposed photosensitive resin layer is developed to form a decorative material pattern laminated material (ii) (hereinafter referred to as “decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminated material (ii)”). Also referred to as)),
It is preferable to include the process of laminating | stacking the said decorating material pattern containing laminated material for decorating material formation on the said board | substrate in the state which made the said decorating material pattern side oppose the board | substrate.
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法の第二の態様では、前記条件(M)を満たし、
 支持体上に下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)を、基板に前記加飾材パターン側を対向させた状態で当該基板に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
In the 2nd aspect of the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, the said conditions (M) are satisfy | filled,
A decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer on a support in this order, and the decorative material on a substrate. It is preferable to include a step of laminating the substrate with the pattern sides facing each other.
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法の第三の態様では、前記条件(N)を満たし、
 支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
 露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、
 前記加飾材形成用積層材料の前記加飾材パターン側を基板上に積層する工程と、
 支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
In the 3rd aspect of the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, the said conditions (N) are satisfy | filled,
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support;
Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and
A step of laminating the decorative material pattern side of the decorative material forming laminate material on a substrate;
It is preferable to include a step of laminating the base color layer of another decorative material forming laminate material having a base color layer on the support on the decorating material pattern.
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法の第四の態様では、前記条件(N)を満たし、
 支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を基板上に積層する工程と、
 前記支持体を前記感光性樹脂層から剥離する工程と、
 前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
 露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、
 支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含むことが好ましい。
In the 4th aspect of the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, the said conditions (N) are satisfy | filled,
A step of laminating the photosensitive resin layer of a decorative material-forming laminate material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support on a substrate;
Peeling the support from the photosensitive resin layer;
Exposing the photosensitive resin layer;
Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and
It is preferable to include a step of laminating the base color layer of another decorative material forming laminate material having a base color layer on the support on the decorating material pattern.
 以上の本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法の第一の態様、第二の態様、第三の態様および第四の態様のうち、第一の態様および第二の態様が前記条件(M)を満たす場合と同様の観点から好ましく、支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する本発明の加飾材形成用積層材料を用いる第一の態様がより好ましい。なお、第三の態様および第四の態様で本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板を製造する場合、加飾材形成用積層材料の支持体と感光性樹脂層との間、または、加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の支持体と加飾材パターンとの間に、下地色層を有さない(すなわち、条件(N)を満たす場合は、重畳して条件(M)を満たすことはない)のが好ましい。 Among the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the fourth aspect of the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention described above, the first aspect and the second aspect are the above-mentioned conditions ( It is preferable from the same viewpoint as when M) is satisfied, and the first aspect using the laminated material for forming a decorative material of the present invention having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support is more preferable. In addition, when manufacturing the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention in a 3rd aspect and a 4th aspect, between the support body of the laminated material for decorating material formation and the photosensitive resin layer, or a decorating material. There is no base color layer between the support of the laminated material for pattern-containing decorating material formation and the decorating material pattern (that is, when the condition (N) is satisfied, the condition (M) is overlapped to satisfy the condition (M). It is preferred).
<加飾材形成用積層材料の種類、本発明の加飾材形成用積層材料、本発明の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料>
 本発明の製造方法は、以下の条件(M)または(N)を満たす。
条件(M):前記加飾材形成用積層材料が前記支持体と前記感光性樹脂層または前記加飾材パターンとの間に下地色層を有する。
条件(N):支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含む。
 すなわち、本発明の製造方法は、加飾材パターンおよび下地色層を形成するときに用いる積層材料の種類としては、
支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料(i)を用いてもよいし;支持体上に下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)を用いてもよいし;支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料を用いてもよい。
 支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料(i)は従来知られていない構成であり、支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料のことを本発明の加飾材形成用積層材料とも言う。
 支持体上に下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)は従来知られていない構成であり、支持体上に下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)のことを本発明の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料とも言う。
 なお、本明細書中、特に断りがなく「加飾材形成用積層材料」という場合は、支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料(i)に加え、前記支持体上に下地色層および加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料(ii)および前記支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料をも含む。
 前記条件(M)を満たす場合、積層すべき層を2層以上有するフィルムを一括積層することにより、加飾基板の製造工程を簡略化してコストダウンすることができる。
<Types of decorative material forming laminate material, decorative material forming laminate material of the present invention, decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material of the present invention>
The production method of the present invention satisfies the following condition (M) or (N).
Condition (M): The laminate material for decorating material formation has a base color layer between the support and the photosensitive resin layer or the decorating material pattern.
Condition (N): including a step of laminating the base color layer of another decorating material forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support on the decorating material pattern.
That is, in the production method of the present invention, as the type of the laminated material used when forming the decorative material pattern and the base color layer,
A decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support may be used; the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer are exposed and developed on the support. The decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having the decorative material patterns in this order may be used; other decorative material forming laminate materials having a base color layer on the support May be used.
The decorative material-forming laminate material (i) having the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support has a structure that has not been known so far. The base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer are formed on the support. The laminated material for forming a decorative material in order is also referred to as the laminated material for forming a decorative material of the present invention.
The decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer on a support in this order has a conventionally unknown configuration. The decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material (ii) having a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer on the support in this order. It is also called a laminated material for forming a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material.
In addition, in this specification, when there is no notice in particular and it says "a laminated material for decorating material formation", the laminated material for decorating material formation (i) which has a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support body. In addition, a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminate material (ii) having a base color layer and a decorating material pattern on the support, and other decorative material forming having a base color layer on the support Also includes laminated materials.
When satisfy | filling the said condition (M), the manufacturing process of a decoration board | substrate can be simplified and cost-reduced by laminating | stacking the film which has two or more layers which should be laminated | stacked collectively.
 本発明の製造方法によれば、基板上に加飾材パターンと下地色層を有する加飾材パターン付き基板を製造するときに、特開2011-8448号公報に記載されているような感圧感熱接着材層を用いなくても、加飾材パターンや下地色層を基板上に積層することができる。
 前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料に含まれる前記感光性樹脂層、下地色層、ならびに、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを、後述する基板に積層(積層後に前記支持体を剥離して、目的とする層のみを転写してもよい)することで、基板上に感光性樹脂層、下地色層、ならびに、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを形成することができる。
 なお、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料に含まれる感光性樹脂層、下地色層、ならびに、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンは、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板における加飾材パターンおよび下地色層と同じ組成であることが好ましいが、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料における感光性樹脂層、下地色層、ならびに、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンは前記基板への積層後の製造工程によっては組成が異なっていてもよい。例えば、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料における感光性樹脂層、下地色層、ならびに、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンが重合性化合物を有する場合、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板における加飾材パターンおよび下地色層では、前記重合性化合物の含有割合が変化していてもよい。
According to the production method of the present invention, when producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern having a decorating material pattern and a base color layer on the substrate, pressure sensitivity as described in JP2011-8448A is disclosed. Even without using a heat-sensitive adhesive layer, a decorating material pattern and a base color layer can be laminated on the substrate.
The photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the decorative material formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer contained in the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material By laminating the pattern on the substrate described later (the support may be peeled off after the lamination to transfer only the target layer), the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive layer are formed on the substrate. A decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the functional resin layer can be formed.
Note that the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the decorative resin layer that are included in the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material are exposed and developed. The material pattern preferably has the same composition as the decorative material pattern and the base color layer in the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention, but the decorative material forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material formation The composition of the decorative resin pattern in which the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive resin layer in the laminated material for exposure are exposed and developed may vary depending on the production process after lamination on the substrate. For example, the decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the photosensitive resin layer in the decorative material forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminated material. When has a polymeric compound, the content rate of the said polymeric compound may be changing in the decorating material pattern and the base color layer in the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention.
(感光性樹脂層)
 本発明の製造方法では、支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料は、感光性樹脂層を含む。
 前記感光性樹脂層としては特に制限はなく、例えば特開2010-237589号公報に記載の感光性組成物や特開2010-237589号公報の[0071]でカラーフィルターの着色組成物として用いられている材料、すなわち特開2004-347831号公報の[0046]~[0059]に記載の着色組成物などを用いることができ、これらの公報に記載の内容は本発明に組み込まれる。
 具体的には、前記感光性樹脂層は、側鎖に酸性基を有する樹脂(A)を含有することが好ましい。
 また、前記感光性樹脂層は、重合性化合物(B)、及び光重合開始剤(C)を含有することが好ましく、光重合開始剤およびエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましく、光重合開始剤ならびにジペンタエリスリトールアクリレート化合物B1(下記)及びトリペンタエリスリトールアクリレート化合物B2(下記)を少なくとも含むことが特に好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
(Xは、水素原子又はH2C=CR-CO-を表し、分子中のXの少なくとも4個はH2C=CR-CO-を表す。Rは、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4の炭化水素基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
(Xは、水素原子又はH2C=CR-CO-を表し、分子中のXの少なくとも6個はH2C=CR-CO-を表す。Rは、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4の炭化水素基を表す。)
 また、前記感光性樹脂層は、必要に応じて、顔料や染料などの着色剤(黒色顔料、ルチル型酸化チタンなどの白色顔料)、界面活性剤などのその他の成分を用いて構成することができる。前記感光性樹脂層に用いられる白色顔料の好ましい範囲は、後述の下地色層に用いられる白色顔料の好ましい範囲と同様である。
 前記感光性樹脂層に用いられるその他の着色剤およびその好ましい範囲としては、特開2010-237589号公報の[0071]で引用する特開2004-347831号公報の[0049]~[0059]に記載の着色剤およびその好ましい範囲と同様であり、これらの公報に記載の内容は本発明に組み込まれる。例えば、グリーン(緑色)の加飾材パターン形成用の着色剤としては、高色純度と高透過率とを両立させ平坦性を得る観点より、顔料として少なくともC.I.PG-36(C.I.ピクメントグリーン36)及びC.I.PY-138(C.I.ピグメントイエロー138)、C.I.PY-139(C.I.ピグメントイエロー139)、C.I.PY-150(C.I.ピグメントイエロー150)の何れかを含有するものが好ましい。
 これらの着色剤は、所望の加飾材パターンのデザインや色に応じて変更することができる。
(Photosensitive resin layer)
In the manufacturing method of this invention, the laminated material for decorating material formation which has a photosensitive resin layer on a support body contains the photosensitive resin layer.
The photosensitive resin layer is not particularly limited. For example, the photosensitive resin layer is used as a coloring composition for a color filter in the photosensitive composition described in JP2010-237589A or [0071] in JP2010-237589A. Materials, that is, coloring compositions described in [0046] to [0059] of JP-A-2004-347831 can be used, and the contents described in these publications are incorporated in the present invention.
Specifically, the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a resin (A) having an acidic group in the side chain.
The photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound (B) and a photopolymerization initiator (C), more preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and photopolymerization. It is particularly preferable that the initiator contains at least dipentaerythritol acrylate compound B1 (below) and tripentaerythritol acrylate compound B2 (below).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
(X represents a hydrogen atom or H 2 C═CR—CO—, and at least four of X in the molecule represent H 2 C═CR—CO—. R represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 4 Represents a hydrocarbon group of
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
(X represents a hydrogen atom or H 2 C═CR—CO—, and at least 6 of X in the molecule represents H 2 C═CR—CO—. R represents a hydrogen atom or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Represents a hydrocarbon group of
In addition, the photosensitive resin layer may be configured using other components such as a colorant such as a pigment or a dye (a white pigment such as a black pigment or rutile titanium oxide), a surfactant, or the like, if necessary. it can. The preferable range of the white pigment used for the photosensitive resin layer is the same as the preferable range of the white pigment used for the base color layer described later.
Other colorants used in the photosensitive resin layer and preferred ranges thereof are described in [0049] to [0059] of JP-A-2004-347831 cited in [0071] of JP-A-2010-237589. The colorant and the preferred range thereof are the same, and the contents described in these publications are incorporated in the present invention. For example, as a coloring agent for forming a green decorative material pattern, at least C.I. I. PG-36 (C.I. Pigment Green 36) and C.I. I. PY-138 (CI Pigment Yellow 138), C.I. I. PY-139 (CI Pigment Yellow 139), C.I. I. Those containing any of PY-150 (CI Pigment Yellow 150) are preferred.
These colorants can be changed according to the design and color of the desired decorative material pattern.
-樹脂(A)-
 樹脂(A)は側鎖に酸性基を有する。側鎖に酸性基を有するとは、側鎖に酸性基を有する構造単位(基)を有することをいい、該酸性基が主鎖に直接結合する形態であっても、後述の酸性基を有する単量体の具体例に示されるように、酸性基が連結基を介して結合してもよいことを含む。
 又、樹脂(A)は側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有することができる。エチレン性不飽和基が主鎖に直接結合する形態であっても、後述のエチレン性不飽和基を有する単量体の具体例に示されるように、エチレン性不飽和基が連結基を介して結合してもよい。
 また樹脂(A)はより好ましくは、酸性基を有する基(構造単位):Y(yモル%)の他、側鎖に分岐および/または脂環構造を有する基(構造単位):X(xモル%)と、エチレン性不飽和基を有する基(構造単位):Z(zモル%)を含有してなり、必要に応じてその他の基(L)(lモル%)を有していてもよい。また、樹脂(A)中のひとつの基の中にX,Y,及びZが複数組み合わされていてもよい。
-Resin (A)-
Resin (A) has an acidic group in the side chain. Having an acidic group in the side chain means having a structural unit (group) having an acidic group in the side chain. Even if the acidic group is directly bonded to the main chain, it has an acidic group described later. As shown in the specific examples of the monomer, it includes that an acidic group may be bonded via a linking group.
The resin (A) can have an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain. Even in the form in which the ethylenically unsaturated group is directly bonded to the main chain, as shown in the specific example of the monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated group described later, the ethylenically unsaturated group is connected via a linking group. May be combined.
The resin (A) is more preferably a group having an acidic group (structural unit): Y (y mol%), and a group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain (structural unit): X (x Mol%) and a group having an ethylenically unsaturated group (structural unit): Z (z mol%), and having other groups (L) (1 mol%) as necessary. Also good. A plurality of X, Y, and Z may be combined in one group in the resin (A).
 前記酸性基としては、特に制限はなく、公知のものの中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、スルホンアミド基、リン酸基、フェノール性水酸基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、現像性、及び硬化膜の耐水性が優れる点から、カルボキシ基、フェノール性水酸基であることが好ましい。 The acidic group is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known ones, and examples thereof include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. Among these, a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group are preferable from the viewpoint of excellent developability and water resistance of the cured film.
 前記側鎖に酸性基を有するために用いられる単量体としては、特に制限はなく、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリレート類、ビニルエーテル類、ビニルエステル類、(メタ)アクリルアミド類などが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリレート類、ビニルエステル類、(メタ)アクリルアミド類が好ましく、さらに好ましくは(メタ)アクリレート類である。 The monomer used for having an acidic group in the side chain is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include styrenes, (meth) acrylates, vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, (meth) acrylamides, (Meth) acrylates, vinyl esters and (meth) acrylamides are preferred, and (meth) acrylates are more preferred.
 前記側鎖に酸性基を有する単量体の具体例としては、公知のものの中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸モノアルキルエステル、フマル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、桂皮酸、ソルビン酸、α-シアノ桂皮酸、アクリル酸ダイマー、水酸基を有する単量体と環状酸無水物との付加反応物、ω-カルボキシ-ポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。これらは、適宜製造したものを使用してもよいし、市販品を使用してもよい。 Specific examples of the monomer having an acidic group in the side chain can be appropriately selected from known ones, such as (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, Fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, sorbic acid, α-cyanocinnamic acid, acrylic acid dimer, addition reaction product of monomer having hydroxyl group and cyclic acid anhydride, ω-carboxy-polycaprolactone mono ( And (meth) acrylate. As these, those produced as appropriate may be used, or commercially available products may be used.
 前記水酸基を有する単量体と環状酸無水物との付加反応物に用いられる水酸基を有する単量体としては、例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。前記環状酸無水物としては、例えば、無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物等が挙げられる。これらの中でも現像性に優れ、低コストである点で(メタ)アクリル酸等が好ましい。 Examples of the monomer having a hydroxyl group used in the addition reaction product of the monomer having a hydroxyl group and a cyclic acid anhydride include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate. Examples of the cyclic acid anhydride include maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, and cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid and the like are preferable in terms of excellent developability and low cost.
 前記「側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基」を有する単量体としては、特に制限はなく、エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。また、エチレン性不飽和基と単量体との連結はエステル基、アミド基、カルバモイル基などの2価の連結基であれば特に制限はない。
 側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を導入する方法は公知のものの中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、酸性基を持つ基にエポキシ基を持つ(メタ)アクリレートを付加する方法、ヒドロキシル基を持つ基にイソシアネート基を持つ(メタ)アクリレートを付加した付加する方法、イソシアネート基を持つ基にヒドロキシ基を持つ(メタ)アクリレートを付加する方法などが挙げられる。
 その中でも、酸性基を持つ繰り返し単位にエポキシ基を持つ(メタ)アクリレートを付加する方法が最も製造が容易であり、低コストである点で好ましい。
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which has the said "ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain", As a ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable. The connection between the ethylenically unsaturated group and the monomer is not particularly limited as long as it is a divalent linking group such as an ester group, an amide group, or a carbamoyl group.
The method of introducing an ethylenically unsaturated group into the side chain can be appropriately selected from known ones, for example, a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group to a group having an acidic group, or having a hydroxyl group Examples include a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having an isocyanate group to the group, a method of adding a (meth) acrylate having a hydroxy group to a group having an isocyanate group, and the like.
Among these, the method of adding (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group to a repeating unit having an acidic group is most preferable because it is the easiest to produce and is low in cost.
 前記エチレン性不飽和結合及びエポキシ基を有する(メタ)アクリレートとしては、これらを有すれば特に制限はない。 The (meth) acrylate having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and an epoxy group is not particularly limited as long as it has these.
 その他の単量体としては、特に制限はなく、例えば分岐および/または脂環構造をもたない(メタ)アクリル酸エステル基、スチレン基、ビニルエーテル基、二塩基酸無水物基、ビニルエステル基、炭化水素アルケニル基等を有する単量体などが挙げられる。
前記ビニルエーテル基としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、ブチルビニルエーテル基などが挙げられる。
Other monomers are not particularly limited, for example, (meth) acrylic acid ester groups, styrene groups, vinyl ether groups, dibasic acid anhydride groups, vinyl ester groups having no branched and / or alicyclic structures, And monomers having a hydrocarbon alkenyl group.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as said vinyl ether group, For example, a butyl vinyl ether group etc. are mentioned.
 前記二塩基酸無水物基としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、無水マレイン酸基、無水イタコン酸基などが挙げられる。
 前記ビニルエステル基としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、酢酸ビニル基などが挙げられる。
 前記炭化水素アルケニル基としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、ブタジエン基、イソプレン基などが挙げられる。
The dibasic acid anhydride group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a maleic anhydride group and an itaconic anhydride group.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as said vinyl ester group, For example, a vinyl acetate group etc. are mentioned.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as said hydrocarbon alkenyl group, For example, a butadiene group, an isoprene group, etc. are mentioned.
 前記樹脂(A)におけるその他の単量体の含有率としては、モル組成比が、0~30mol%であることが好ましく、0~20mol%であることがより好ましい。 As the content of other monomers in the resin (A), the molar composition ratio is preferably 0 to 30 mol%, and more preferably 0 to 20 mol%.
 樹脂(A)の具体例としては、例えば、特開2008-146018号公報の段落番号[0057]~[0063]に記載される化合物P-1~P-35で表される化合物が挙げられる。
 さらに、樹脂(A)の具体例としては、特開2010-237589号公報の[0071]で引用する特開2004-347831号公報の[0047]および[0048]に記載の側鎖にカルボン酸基やカルボン酸塩基等の極性基を有するポリマーを挙げることができ、その例としては、特開昭59-44615号公報、特公昭54-34327号公報、特公昭58-12577号公報、特公昭54-25957号公報、特開昭59-53836号公報、及び特開昭59-71048号公報等に記載されている様なメタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体等を挙げることができる。また側鎖にカルボン酸基を有するセルロース誘導体も挙げることができる。この他に水酸基を有するポリマーに環状酸無水物を付加したものも好ましく使用することができる。特に、米国特許第4139391号明細書に記載のベンジル(メタ)アクリレートと(メタ)アクリル酸との共重合体やベンジル(メタ)アクリレートと(メタ)アクリル酸と他のモノマーとの多元共重合体を挙げることができる。これらの極性基を有するバインダーポリマーは、単独で用いてもよく、或いは通常の膜形成能の有るポリマーと併用する組成物の状態で使用してもよい。
 なお、これらの樹脂(A)の具体例として挙げた公開公報に記載の内容は本発明に組み込まれる。
Specific examples of the resin (A) include compounds represented by compounds P-1 to P-35 described in paragraph numbers [0057] to [0063] of JP-A-2008-146018.
Further, specific examples of the resin (A) include carboxylic acid groups in the side chain described in [0047] and [0048] of JP-A-2004-347831 cited in [0071] of JP-A-2010-237589. Examples thereof include polymers having polar groups such as carboxylic acid groups, and examples thereof include JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, and JP-B-54. Methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, croton as described in JP-A-25-25957, JP-A-59-53836, and JP-A-59-71048 Examples thereof include an acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partially esterified maleic acid copolymer. Moreover, the cellulose derivative which has a carboxylic acid group in a side chain can also be mentioned. In addition, a polymer having a hydroxyl group added to a cyclic acid anhydride can also be preferably used. In particular, a copolymer of benzyl (meth) acrylate and (meth) acrylic acid or a multicomponent copolymer of benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid and other monomers described in US Pat. No. 4,139,391 Can be mentioned. These binder polymers having a polar group may be used alone, or may be used in the state of a composition used in combination with an ordinary polymer having film-forming ability.
In addition, the content described in the publications cited as specific examples of these resins (A) is incorporated in the present invention.
 前記樹脂(A)は、モノマーの(共)重合反応の工程とエチレン性不飽和基を導入する工程の二段階の工程から作られる。 まず、(共)重合反応は種々のモノマーの(共)重合反応によって作られ、特に制限はなく公知のものの中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、重合の活性種については、ラジカル重合、カチオン重合、アニオン重合、配位重合などを適宜選択することができる。これらの中でも合成が容易であり、低コストである点からラジカル重合であることが好ましい。また、重合方法についても特に制限はなく公知のものの中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、バルク重合法、懸濁重合法、乳化重合法、溶液重合法などを適宜選択することができる。これらの中でも、溶液重合法であることがより望ましい。 The resin (A) is made from a two-stage process including a monomer (co) polymerization reaction process and an ethylenically unsaturated group introduction process. First, the (co) polymerization reaction is made by a (co) polymerization reaction of various monomers, and is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known ones. For example, radical polymerization, cationic polymerization, anionic polymerization, coordination polymerization and the like can be appropriately selected for the active species of polymerization. Among these, radical polymerization is preferable from the viewpoint of easy synthesis and low cost. Moreover, there is no restriction | limiting in particular also about the polymerization method, It can select suitably from well-known things. For example, a bulk polymerization method, a suspension polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a solution polymerization method and the like can be appropriately selected. Among these, the solution polymerization method is more desirable.
 樹脂(A)として好適な前記共重合体の重量平均分子量は、10,000~10万が好ましく、12,000~6万が更に好ましく、15,000~4.5万が特に好ましい。重量平均分子量が前記範囲内であると、共重合体の製造適性、現像性の点で望ましい。また、溶融粘度の低下により形成された形状が潰れ難い点で、また、架橋不良となり難い点、現像での残渣がない点で好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the copolymer suitable as the resin (A) is preferably 10,000 to 100,000, more preferably 12,000 to 60,000, and particularly preferably 15,000 to 45,000. When the weight average molecular weight is within the above range, it is desirable from the viewpoint of production suitability and developability of the copolymer. Moreover, it is preferable at the point that the shape formed by the fall of melt viscosity is hard to be crushed, it is hard to become a crosslinking defect, and there is no residue in development.
 樹脂(A)として好適なガラス転移温度(Tg)は、40~180℃であることが好ましく、45~140℃であることはより好ましく、50~130℃であることが特に好ましい。ガラス転移温度(Tg)が前記好ましい範囲内であると、良好な現像性、力学強度が得られる。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) suitable for the resin (A) is preferably 40 to 180 ° C, more preferably 45 to 140 ° C, and particularly preferably 50 to 130 ° C. When the glass transition temperature (Tg) is within the preferred range, good developability and mechanical strength can be obtained.
 樹脂(A)として好適な酸価はとりうる分子構造により好ましい範囲は変動するが、一般には20mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることはより好ましく、70~130mgKOH/gであることが特に好ましい。酸価が前記好ましい範囲内であると、良好な現像性、力学強度が得られる。 The preferred range of the acid value suitable for the resin (A) varies depending on the molecular structure that can be taken, but generally it is preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and 70 to 130 mgKOH / g. It is particularly preferred that When the acid value is within the preferred range, good developability and mechanical strength can be obtained.
 前記樹脂(A)のガラス転移温度(Tg)が40~180℃であり、かつ重量平均分子量が10,000~100,000であることが良好な現像性、力学強度が得られる点で好ましい。
 更に、前記樹脂(A)の好ましい例は、好ましい前記分子量、ガラス転移温度(Tg)、及び酸価のそれぞれの組合せがより好ましい。
The resin (A) preferably has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of 40 to 180 ° C. and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of obtaining good developability and mechanical strength.
Furthermore, the preferable example of the said resin (A) has more preferable each combination of the said preferable molecular weight, glass transition temperature (Tg), and an acid value.
 樹脂(A)は、前記側鎖に分岐および/または脂環構造を有する基:X(xモル%)と、酸性基を有する基:Y(yモル%)と、エチレン性不飽和基を有する基:Z(zモル%)とをそれぞれ別の共重合単位に有する少なくとも3元共重合以上の共重合体であることが変形回復率、現像残渣、耐振動性、レチキュレーションの観点から好ましい。具体的には、前記X,Y,Zを構成する各々の単量体を少なくとも1つ共重合させてなる共重合体が好ましい。
 前記樹脂(A)の前記各成分の共重合組成比については、ガラス転移温度と酸価を勘案して決定され、一概に言えないが、「側鎖に分岐および/または脂環構造を有する基」は10~70モル%が好ましく、15~65モル%が更に好ましく、20~60モル%が特に好ましい。側鎖に分岐および/または脂環構造を有する基が前記範囲内であると、良好な現像性が得られると共に、画像部の現像液耐性も良好である。
 また、「側鎖に酸性基を有する基」は5~70モル%が好ましく、10~60モル%が更に好ましく、20~50モル%が特に好ましい。側鎖に酸性基を有する基が前記範囲内であると、良好な硬化性、現像性が得られる。
 また、「側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する基」は10~70モル%が好ましく、20~70モル%が更に好ましく、30~70モル%が特に好ましい。側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する基が前記範囲内であると、顔料分散性に優れると共に、現像性及び硬化性も良好である。
Resin (A) has a group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain: X (x mol%), a group having an acidic group: Y (y mol%), and an ethylenically unsaturated group. From the viewpoint of deformation recovery rate, development residue, vibration resistance, and reticulation, it is preferably a copolymer of at least ternary copolymer having the group: Z (z mol%) in different copolymer units. . Specifically, a copolymer obtained by copolymerizing at least one of the monomers constituting the X, Y, and Z is preferable.
The copolymer composition ratio of the respective components of the resin (A) is determined in consideration of the glass transition temperature and the acid value, and cannot be generally stated, but “group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain” "Is preferably 10 to 70 mol%, more preferably 15 to 65 mol%, and particularly preferably 20 to 60 mol%. When the group having a branched and / or alicyclic structure in the side chain is within the above range, good developability is obtained and the developer resistance of the image area is also good.
The “group having an acidic group in the side chain” is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 60 mol%, and particularly preferably 20 to 50 mol%. When the group having an acidic group in the side chain is within the above range, good curability and developability can be obtained.
The “group having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain” is preferably 10 to 70 mol%, more preferably 20 to 70 mol%, particularly preferably 30 to 70 mol%. When the group having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain is within the above range, the pigment dispersibility is excellent, and the developability and curability are also good.
 前記樹脂(A)の含有量としては、前記感光性組成物全固形分に対して、5~70質量%が好ましく、10~50質量%がより好ましい。樹脂(A)は後述のその他の樹脂を含有することができるが、樹脂(A)のみが好ましい。 The content of the resin (A) is preferably 5 to 70% by mass and more preferably 10 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive composition. The resin (A) can contain other resins described later, but only the resin (A) is preferable.
 前記樹脂(A)と併用することができるその他の樹脂としては、アルカリ性水溶液に対して膨潤性を示す化合物が好ましく、アルカリ性水溶液に対して可溶性である化合物がより好ましい。
 アルカリ性水溶液に対して膨潤性又は溶解性を示す樹脂としては、例えば、酸性基を有するものが好適に挙げられ、具体的には、エポキシ化合物にエチレン性不飽和二重結合と酸性基とを導入した化合物(エポキシアクリレート化合物)、側鎖に(メタ)アクリロイル基及び酸性基を有するビニル共重合体、エポキシアクリレート化合物と、側鎖に(メタ)アクリロイル基及び酸性基を有するビニル共重合体との混合物、マレアミド酸系共重合体、などが好ましい。
 前記酸性基としては、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができ、例えば、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、などが挙げられ、これらの中でも、原料の入手性などの観点から、カルボキシル基が好ましく挙げられる。
The other resin that can be used in combination with the resin (A) is preferably a compound that shows swelling property with respect to an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably a compound that is soluble in the alkaline aqueous solution.
As the resin exhibiting swellability or solubility with respect to an alkaline aqueous solution, for example, those having an acidic group are preferably mentioned. Specifically, an ethylenically unsaturated double bond and an acidic group are introduced into an epoxy compound. Compound (epoxy acrylate compound), vinyl copolymer having (meth) acryloyl group and acidic group in side chain, epoxy acrylate compound and vinyl copolymer having (meth) acryloyl group and acidic group in side chain A mixture, a maleamic acid copolymer, and the like are preferable.
The acidic group is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the intended purpose. Examples thereof include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Among these, the availability of raw materials, etc. From the viewpoint, a carboxyl group is preferable.
 前記樹脂(A)と併用することができるその他の樹脂との合計の含有量としては、前記感光性組成物全固形分に対して、5~70質量%が好ましく、10~50質量%がより好ましい。該固形分含有量が、5質量%未満であると、後述する感光層の膜強度が弱くなりやすく、該感光層の表面のタック性が悪化することがあり、70質量%を超えると、露光感度が低下することがある。なお、前記含有量は、固形分含有量のことを示している。 The total content of the resin (A) and other resins that can be used in combination is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 50% by mass, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive composition. preferable. When the solid content is less than 5% by mass, the film strength of the photosensitive layer described later tends to be weak, and the tackiness of the surface of the photosensitive layer may be deteriorated. Sensitivity may decrease. In addition, the said content has shown that solid content.
-重合性化合物(B)-
 重合性化合物(B)は上記化合物B1及びB2を少なくとも含むことが好ましい。
 前記感光性組成物は、該化合物B1及び化合物B2の重合性化合物(B)の合計量に対する含有率W1(質量%)及びW2(質量%)が、下記式(1)及び式(2)を同時に満たすことが好ましい。ここで、重合性化合物(B)の合計量に対する化合物B1の含有率がW1(質量%)であり、重合性化合物(B)の合計量に対する化合物B2の含有率がW2(質量%)である。
-Polymerizable compound (B)-
The polymerizable compound (B) preferably contains at least the compounds B1 and B2.
In the photosensitive composition, the contents W1 (% by mass) and W2 (% by mass) with respect to the total amount of the polymerizable compound (B) of the compound B1 and the compound B2 are represented by the following formulas (1) and (2). It is preferable to satisfy them simultaneously. Here, the content of compound B1 with respect to the total amount of polymerizable compound (B) is W1 (mass%), and the content of compound B2 with respect to the total amount of polymerizable compound (B) is W2 (mass%). .
0.6≦W2/W1≦3.0 ・・・・(1)
63%≦W1+W2≦100% ・・・・(2)
0.6 ≦ W2 / W1 ≦ 3.0 (1)
63% ≦ W1 + W2 ≦ 100% (2)
 前記感光性組成物は、上記式(1)及び(2)を満たすことにより、周波数の高い振動に対しても耐えることができる力学強度の高い加飾材パターンを提供することができるものとなる。 By satisfy | filling said Formula (1) and (2), the said photosensitive composition will be able to provide the decorating material pattern with high dynamic strength which can endure the vibration with a high frequency. .
 化合物B1中のXは水素原子又はH2C=CR-CO-を表し、分子中のXの少なくとも4個はH2C=CR-CO-を表し、より好ましくは5個以上であり、最も好ましくは5.5個及び6個である。
 またRは、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4の炭化水素基を表し、より好ましくは水素原子、又は炭素数1~2の炭化水素基であり、最も好ましいのは、水素原子又はメチル基である。化合物B1の具体例としては、具体的にはジペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート及びそれらの混合物が挙げられる。中でもジペンタエリスリトールペンタメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート及びそれらの混合物がより好ましい。
X in compound B1 represents a hydrogen atom or H 2 C═CR—CO—, and at least 4 of X in the molecule represents H 2 C═CR—CO—, more preferably 5 or more, The number is preferably 5.5 and 6.
R represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and most preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. is there. Specific examples of compound B1 are specifically dipentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and their A mixture is mentioned. Of these, dipentaerythritol pentamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and mixtures thereof are more preferred.
 化合物B2中のXは、水素原子又はH2C=CR-CO-を表し、分子中のXの少なくとも6個はH2C=CR-CO-を表し、より好ましくは7個以上であり、最も好ましいのは、7.5個及び8個である。
 またRは、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4の炭化水素基を表し、より好ましくは水素原子、又は炭素数1~2の炭化水素基であり、最も好ましいのは、水素原子又はメチル基である。化合物B2の具体例としては、具体的にはトリペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールヘプタメタクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールオクタメタクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールヘプタアクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールオクタアクリレート及びそれらの混合物が挙げられる。中でもトリペンタエリスリトールヘプタメタクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールオクタメタクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールヘプタアクリレート、トリペンタエリスリトールオクタアクリレート及びそれらの混合物がより好ましい。
X in compound B2 represents a hydrogen atom or H 2 C═CR—CO—, and at least 6 of X in the molecule represents H 2 C═CR—CO—, more preferably 7 or more, Most preferred are 7.5 and 8.
R represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and most preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. is there. Specific examples of compound B2 are specifically tripentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, tripentaerythritol heptamethacrylate, tripentaerythritol octamethacrylate, tripentaerythritol hexaacrylate, tripentaerythritol heptaacrylate, tripentaerythritol octaacrylate and their A mixture is mentioned. Of these, tripentaerythritol heptamethacrylate, tripentaerythritol octamethacrylate, tripentaerythritol heptaacrylate, tripentaerythritol octaacrylate, and mixtures thereof are more preferred.
 前記化合物B1及びB2の重合性化合物(B)の合計量に対する含有率W1(%)及びW2(%)は上記式(1)及び式(2)を同時に満たすことが好ましいが、含有率W1(%)及びW2(%)の合計は耐振動性の観点からより好ましくは65%以上95%、さらに好ましくは70%以上90%以下である。63%未満になると、耐振動性が悪化する場合がある。 It is preferable that the contents W1 (%) and W2 (%) of the compounds B1 and B2 with respect to the total amount of the polymerizable compound (B) satisfy the above formulas (1) and (2) at the same time. %) And W2 (%) are preferably 65% to 95%, more preferably 70% to 90% from the viewpoint of vibration resistance. If it is less than 63%, vibration resistance may deteriorate.
 一方、含有率W1(%)とW2(%)の比率W2/W1は、0.6以上3.0以下とすることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.62以上2.95以下、さらに好ましくは0.7以上2.6以下である。0.6未満であると、現像した際の、加飾材パターンと基板の密着が低下すると同時に、耐振動性が悪化する。3.0を超えると現像残渣が悪化すると同時に、耐振動性が悪化する。 On the other hand, the ratio W2 / W1 of the contents W1 (%) and W2 (%) is preferably 0.6 or more and 3.0 or less, more preferably 0.62 or more and 2.95 or less, and still more preferably 0. 7 or more and 2.6 or less. If it is less than 0.6, the adhesion between the decorative material pattern and the substrate when developed is lowered, and at the same time, the vibration resistance is deteriorated. If it exceeds 3.0, the development residue is deteriorated and at the same time the vibration resistance is deteriorated.
 その他併用できる重合性化合物としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落番号[0011]に記載の成分や、特開2006-64921号公報の段落番号[0040]~[0049]に記載した成分が併用できる。 Other polymerizable compounds that can be used in combination include the components described in paragraph No. [0011] of JP-A-2006-23696 and the components described in paragraph Nos. [0040] to [0049] of JP-A-2006-64921. Can be used together.
 前記樹脂(A)との関係において、重合性化合物(B)の樹脂(A)に対する質量比率((B)/(A)比)が0.5~2.0であることが好ましく、0.6~1.4であることはより好ましく、0.7~1.2であることが特に好ましい。(B)/(A)比が前記好ましい範囲内であると、良好な現像性、力学強度が得られる。 In the relationship with the resin (A), the mass ratio of the polymerizable compound (B) to the resin (A) ((B) / (A) ratio) is preferably 0.5 to 2.0, and It is more preferably 6 to 1.4, and particularly preferably 0.7 to 1.2. When the ratio (B) / (A) is within the preferred range, good developability and mechanical strength can be obtained.
-光重合開始剤(C)、その他の成分-
 光重合開始剤(C)、その他の成分として公知の組成物を構成する成分を好適に用いることができ、例えば、特開2006-23696号公報の段落番号[0012]~[0020]に記載の成分や、特開2006-64921号公報の段落番号[0050]~[0053]に記載の成分が挙げられる。
-Photopolymerization initiator (C) and other components-
As the photopolymerization initiator (C), other components that constitute a known composition can be suitably used. For example, as described in paragraphs [0012] to [0020] Ingredients and ingredients described in paragraph numbers [0050] to [0053] of JP-A-2006-64921 are exemplified.
 前記光重合開始剤(C)の含有量としては、樹脂(A)に対して0.1~20質量%が好ましく、0.5~10質量%がより好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator (C) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass with respect to the resin (A).
 本発明の製造方法では、感光性樹脂層は、ラミネートの時に積層し易くするために柔らかいほうが好ましいため、光重合開始剤や、モノマーとも呼ばれるエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むネガ型の方が好ましい。
 又、ポジ型の感光性樹脂層は硬い膜になるため、フィルムのカット時に粉落ちの問題を生じ易いことも、ネガ型の感光性樹脂層が好ましいことの理由である。
In the production method of the present invention, the photosensitive resin layer is preferably soft so as to be easily laminated at the time of lamination, and therefore a negative type containing a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound also called a monomer is preferable.
Further, since the positive photosensitive resin layer is a hard film, the problem of powder falling off easily when the film is cut is also a reason why the negative photosensitive resin layer is preferable.
-感光性樹脂層の厚み-
 前記感光性樹脂層は、白色以外の感光性樹脂層である場合には、特に厚みの制限は無いが、薄膜化の観点から、前記感光性樹脂層の厚みは0.1~10μmであることが好ましく、0.5~7μmであることがより好ましく、1~5μmであることが特に好ましい。
 通常、白色層を設ける場合は数10μm以上の厚みにしなければ、十分な隠ぺい力と白色度を得られない。
 これに対し、本発明では前記感光性樹脂層が白色の感光性樹脂層である場合には、金属光沢層(例えばアルミ蒸着層などの金属薄膜層)上に白色の感光性樹脂層を設けることで、前記白色の感光性樹脂層の厚みが数10μm以下であっても十分な隠ぺい力と白色度を得ることができる。金属光沢層上に白色の感光性樹脂層を設けるときの前記白色の感光性樹脂層の厚みは、薄膜化および隠ぺい力の観点から、0.5~20μmであることが好ましく、1~10μmであることがより好ましく、3~5μmであることが特に好ましい。
 なお、後述の加飾材パターンの厚みの好ましい範囲も、前記感光性樹脂層の厚みの好ましい範囲と同様である。
-Thickness of photosensitive resin layer-
When the photosensitive resin layer is a photosensitive resin layer other than white, the thickness is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of thinning, the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 0.1 to 10 μm. Is more preferable, 0.5 to 7 μm is more preferable, and 1 to 5 μm is particularly preferable.
Usually, when a white layer is provided, sufficient hiding power and whiteness cannot be obtained unless the thickness is several tens of μm or more.
On the other hand, in the present invention, when the photosensitive resin layer is a white photosensitive resin layer, a white photosensitive resin layer is provided on a metallic luster layer (for example, a metal thin film layer such as an aluminum vapor deposition layer). Thus, even if the thickness of the white photosensitive resin layer is several tens of μm or less, sufficient hiding power and whiteness can be obtained. When the white photosensitive resin layer is provided on the metallic gloss layer, the thickness of the white photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 to 20 μm from the viewpoint of thinning and hiding power, and preferably 1 to 10 μm. More preferably, it is 3 to 5 μm.
In addition, the preferable range of the thickness of the decorating material pattern mentioned later is the same as the preferable range of the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer.
(支持体)
 前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料は支持体を有する。
 前記支持体としては、可撓性を有し、加圧、若しくは加圧及び加熱下においても著しい変形、収縮若しくは伸びを生じないことが好ましい。そのような支持体の例としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等を挙げることができ、中でも2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
 支持体の厚みには特に限定はないが、5~300μmが好ましく、20~200μmがより好ましい。
 また、支持体は透明でもよいし、染料化ケイ素、アルミナゾル、クロム塩、ジルコニウム塩などを含有していてもよい。
 また、支持体には、特開2005-221726号公報に記載の方法などにより、導電性を付与することができる。
(Support)
The said laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation has a support body.
The support is preferably flexible and does not cause significant deformation, shrinkage or elongation even under pressure, or under pressure and heat. Examples of such a support include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film, and among them, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
The thickness of the support is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 300 μm, more preferably 20 to 200 μm.
Further, the support may be transparent or may contain dyed silicon, alumina sol, chromium salt, zirconium salt, or the like.
Further, the support can be provided with conductivity by a method described in JP-A-2005-221726.
(下地色層)
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法に用いられる加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料は、下地色層を含む。
(Background color layer)
The decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material used in the method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention includes a base color layer.
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、感光性樹脂層の色を映えさせる観点から、前記下地色層が白色層であることが好ましい。又、下地色層は好ましいデザイン上の観点から、金属光沢層であることが求められることがある。
 以下、下地色層が白色層および金属光沢層である場合について説明するが、本発明は以下の態様に制限されるものではなく、下地色層は、白色層および金属光沢層以外のその他の色の層であってもよい。
In the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention, the base color layer is preferably a white layer from the viewpoint of reflecting the color of the photosensitive resin layer. Further, the base color layer may be required to be a metallic luster layer from the viewpoint of a preferable design.
Hereinafter, the case where the background color layer is a white layer and a metallic luster layer will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments, and the base color layer may have other colors other than the white layer and the metal luster layer. It may be a layer.
-シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂-
 前記白色層はシロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂を含むことが好ましい。但し、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、本発明の趣旨に反しない限りにおいて前記白色層中に前記顔料以外の成分を含んでいてもよい。
-Resin with siloxane bond in the main chain-
The white layer preferably contains a resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain. However, the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention may contain components other than the said pigment in the said white layer, unless it is contrary to the meaning of this invention.
 前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂としては、特に制限はないが、シリコーン系レジンが好ましい。
 シリコーン系レジンとして公知のものが使用できる。メチル系ストレートシリコーンレジン、メチルフェニル系ストレートシリコーンレジン、アクリル樹脂変性シリコーンレジン、ポリエステル樹脂変性シリコーンレジン、エポキシ樹脂変性シリコーンレジン、アルキッド樹脂、変性シリコーンレジン及びゴム系のシリコーンレジン等が使用できる。
 より好ましいのは、メチル系ストレートシリコーンレジン、メチルフェニル系ストレートシリコーンレジン、アクリル樹脂変性シリコーンレジンであり、特に好ましいのは、メチル系ストレートシリコーンレジン、メチルフェニル系ストレートシリコーンレジンである。
 前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂は、1種のみを用いても、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。これらを任意の比率で混合することにより膜物性を制御することもできる。
 前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂としては、市販のものを用いてもよく、例えば、KR300、KR311、KR251、X40-9246(以上、信越シリコーン(株)製)などを用いることができ、その中でもKR251、X40-9246(以上、信越シリコーン(株)製)が密着性や材料をスリットする時等の加工適性の観点からより好ましく、KR251およびX40-9246(以上、信越シリコーン(株)製)の2種混合が特に好ましい。
 前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂は有機溶媒などに溶解されたものを用いてもよく、例えば、キシレン溶液に溶解されたものを用いることができる。
 また、前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂には、硬化性を高める観点から、重合触媒として公知の化合物を添加することが好ましく、亜鉛系の重合触媒を添加することがより好ましい。前記重合触媒としては、市販のものを用いてもよく、例えば、D-15(信越シリコーン(株)製)などを用いることができる。
The resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain is not particularly limited, but a silicone resin is preferable.
Known silicone resins can be used. A methyl-based straight silicone resin, a methylphenyl-based straight silicone resin, an acrylic resin-modified silicone resin, a polyester resin-modified silicone resin, an epoxy resin-modified silicone resin, an alkyd resin, a modified silicone resin, and a rubber-based silicone resin can be used.
More preferred are methyl straight silicone resin, methylphenyl straight silicone resin, and acrylic resin-modified silicone resin, and particularly preferred are methyl straight silicone resin and methylphenyl straight silicone resin.
The resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The film physical properties can be controlled by mixing these at an arbitrary ratio.
As the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain, a commercially available resin may be used, and for example, KR300, KR311, KR251, X40-9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) can be used. Among these, KR251 and X40-9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) are more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion and workability when slitting the material. KR251 and X40-9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) Two types of mixtures of these are especially preferable.
As the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain, a resin dissolved in an organic solvent or the like may be used. For example, a resin dissolved in a xylene solution may be used.
Moreover, it is preferable to add a known compound as a polymerization catalyst to the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain, and more preferable to add a zinc-based polymerization catalyst. A commercially available catalyst may be used as the polymerization catalyst, for example, D-15 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) or the like can be used.
 前記白色層中に含まれていてもよい顔料以外の成分としては、特に制限はないが、公知のバインダー樹脂、前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂に加えて、公知の顔料分散安定剤、公知の塗布助剤等、を用いることができるが、前記白色層の色味が変わらない、または望ましい色味に変わるものが望ましい。
 前記白色層中に含まれる前記顔料以外の成分に対する前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の割合が80質量%以上であることが本発明の効果を得る観点から好ましく、90質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
The component other than the pigment that may be contained in the white layer is not particularly limited, but in addition to the known binder resin and the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain, a known pigment dispersion stabilizer, However, it is desirable that the color of the white layer does not change or changes to a desired color.
The ratio of the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain to the components other than the pigment contained in the white layer is preferably 80% by mass or more from the viewpoint of obtaining the effects of the present invention, and is 90% by mass or more. Is more preferable.
 前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂および前記顔料以外の成分の前記白色層中における含有量としては、前記白色層の全固形分に対して、30質量%以上とすることが好ましい。前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂および前記顔料以外の成分の含有量が前記範囲内であると、本発明の白色層の色味に好ましい影響を与えることが出来る。
 前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂および前記顔料以外の成分の前記白色層中における含有量としては、30~60質量%がより好ましく、35~55質量%が更に好ましく、40~50質量%がより特に好ましい。
The content of the component other than the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the pigment in the white layer is preferably 30% by mass or more based on the total solid content of the white layer. When the content of the component other than the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the pigment is within the above range, the color of the white layer of the present invention can be favorably affected.
The content of the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the components other than the pigment in the white layer is preferably 30 to 60% by mass, more preferably 35 to 55% by mass, and 40 to 50% by mass. More particularly preferred.
-下地色層用の色材-
 前記下地色層は、特に見栄えがわかりやすいため、以下の白色層用の色材を用いることが好ましい。前記白色層用の色材としては、顔料が好ましく、白色無機顔料がより好ましい。又、下地色層が金属光沢層である場合は好ましいデザイン上の観点から、アルミ、クロム、銀などの金属薄膜層(好ましくは、アルミ、クロム、銀などの金属蒸着層)やアルミフレークなどのメタリック顔料を使用することも好ましい。金属光沢層を設ける手段としては、本発明の製造方法に用いる支持体上に金属蒸着や金属スパッタリング、鍍金で積層する方法や、金属光沢を有するメタリック顔料などの材料を含む層を本発明の製造方法に用いる支持体上に塗布等の公知の方法で形成する方法や、金属光沢を有するメタリック顔料などの材料を含む層を別途形成した転写材料を作製してから、本発明の製造方法に用いる支持体上に該転写材料を転写または積層する方法を挙げることができる。前記下地色層が金属光沢層である場合、支持体と金属光沢層が一体化したものを用いてもよく、例えば市販のアルミ蒸着層付き25μmPETベース(麗光社製、商品名ダイアラスター)などを用いることができる。
 前記白色無機顔料としては、特開2005-7765公報の段落[0015]や[0114]に記載の白色顔料を用いることができる。
 具体的には、前記白色無機顔料としては酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、リトポン、軽質炭酸カルシウム、ホワイトカーボン、酸化アルミニウム、水酸化アルミニウム、硫酸バリウムが好ましく、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛がより好ましく、本発明では前記白色層が酸化チタンであることが特に好ましく、その中でもルチル型またはアナターゼ型酸化チタンがさらに特に好ましく、ルチル型酸化チタンがよりさらに特に好ましい。
-Coloring material for base color layer-
Since the base color layer is particularly easy to see, it is preferable to use the following color material for the white layer. The color material for the white layer is preferably a pigment, and more preferably a white inorganic pigment. In addition, when the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, from the viewpoint of a preferable design, a metal thin film layer (preferably a metal deposition layer such as aluminum, chromium, silver, etc.) such as aluminum, chromium, silver, aluminum flakes, etc. It is also preferable to use metallic pigments. As a means for providing a metallic luster layer, a layer containing a material such as a metallic pigment having a metallic luster, a method of laminating by metal vapor deposition, metal sputtering, or plating on a support used in the production method of the present invention is manufactured according to the present invention. A transfer material in which a layer containing a material such as a metallic pigment having a metallic luster is formed separately by a known method such as coating on a support used in the method is prepared, and then used in the manufacturing method of the present invention. A method of transferring or laminating the transfer material on a support can be mentioned. When the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, a substrate and a metallic luster layer integrated may be used. For example, a commercially available 25 μm PET base with an aluminum vapor deposition layer (product name: Diastar) Can be used.
As the white inorganic pigment, white pigments described in paragraphs [0015] and [0114] of JP-A-2005-7765 can be used.
Specifically, the white inorganic pigment is preferably titanium oxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, or barium sulfate, more preferably titanium oxide or zinc oxide. The white layer is particularly preferably titanium oxide, among which rutile type or anatase type titanium oxide is more particularly preferred, and rutile type titanium oxide is even more particularly preferred.
 酸化チタンの表面はシリカ処理、アルミナ処理、チタニア処理、ジルコニア処理、有機物処理及びそれらを併用することができる。
 これにより酸化チタンの触媒活性を抑制でき、耐熱性、褪光性等を改善することができる。
 加熱後の前記白色層のb値を抑制する観点から、酸化チタンの表面への表面処理はアルミナ処理、ジルコニア処理が好ましく、アルミナ/ジルコニア併用処理が特に好ましい。
The surface of titanium oxide can be used in combination with silica treatment, alumina treatment, titania treatment, zirconia treatment, organic matter treatment and the like.
Thereby, the catalytic activity of titanium oxide can be suppressed, and heat resistance, fluorescence, etc. can be improved.
From the viewpoint of suppressing the b value of the white layer after heating, the surface treatment of the titanium oxide is preferably an alumina treatment or a zirconia treatment, and an alumina / zirconia combined treatment is particularly preferred.
 前記白色層の全固形分に対する前記白色無機顔料の含有率が20~75質量%であることが、導電性層をスパッタにより蒸着するときと同程度の加熱をした後の明度および白色度(L値が高く、a値、b値が低いこと)を良好な範囲とし、その他の求められる特性を同時に満たす加飾材を形成することができる。
 前記白色層の全固形分に対する前記白色無機顔料の含有率は、25~60質量%であることがより好ましく、30~50質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 本明細書でいう白色層の全固形分とは、前記白色層から溶剤等を除いた不揮発成分の総質量を意味する。
The content of the white inorganic pigment with respect to the total solid content of the white layer is 20 to 75% by mass, and the brightness and whiteness (L It is possible to form a decorating material having a high value and a low a value and a low b value) and satisfying other required characteristics at the same time.
The content of the white inorganic pigment with respect to the total solid content of the white layer is more preferably 25 to 60% by mass, and further preferably 30 to 50% by mass.
As used herein, the total solid content of the white layer means the total mass of nonvolatile components excluding the solvent and the like from the white layer.
 前記白色無機顔料(なお、後述する遮光層に用いられるその他の顔料についても同様である)は、分散液として使用することが望ましい。この分散液は、前記白色無機顔料と顔料分散剤とを予め混合して得られる組成物を、有機溶媒(またはビヒクル)に添加して分散させることによって調製することができる。前記ビヒクルとは、塗料が液体状態にある時に顔料を分散させている媒質の部分をいい、液状であって前記顔料と結合して塗膜を形成する成分(バインダー)と、これを溶解希釈する成分(有機溶媒)とを含む。 The white inorganic pigment (which is the same for other pigments used in the light shielding layer described later) is desirably used as a dispersion. This dispersion can be prepared by adding and dispersing a composition obtained by previously mixing the white inorganic pigment and the pigment dispersant in an organic solvent (or vehicle). The vehicle refers to a portion of a medium in which a pigment is dispersed when the paint is in a liquid state, and is a liquid component that binds to the pigment to form a coating film (binder) and dissolves and dilutes it. Component (organic solvent).
 前記白色無機顔料を分散させる際に使用する分散機としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、朝倉邦造著、「顔料の事典」、第一版、朝倉書店、2000年、438項に記載されているニーダー、ロールミル、アトライダー、スーパーミル、ディゾルバ、ホモミキサー、サンドミル等の公知の分散機が挙げられる。更に該文献310頁記載の機械的摩砕により、摩擦力を利用し微粉砕してもよい。 The dispersing machine used for dispersing the white inorganic pigment is not particularly limited, and is described in, for example, Asakura Kunizo, “Encyclopedia of Pigments”, first edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, item 438. Known dispersing machines such as a kneader, a roll mill, an atrider, a super mill, a dissolver, a homomixer, and a sand mill can be used. Further, fine grinding may be performed using frictional force by mechanical grinding described on page 310 of the document.
 前記白色無機顔料(白色層用の色材)としての白色無機顔料は、分散安定性及び隠ぺい力の観点から、一次粒子の平均粒径が0.16μm~0.3μmのものが好ましく、更に0.18μm~0.27μmのものが好ましい。さらに0.19μm~0.25μmのものが特に好ましい。一次粒子の平均粒径が0.16μm以上であると、隠ぺい力が高く、遮光層の下地が見えにくくなり、粘度上昇を起こしにくい。一方、0.3μm以下であると白色度が十分に高く、同時に隠ぺい力が高く、また塗布した際の面状が良好となる。
 尚、ここで言う「一次粒子の平均粒径」とは粒子の電子顕微鏡写真画像を同面積の円とした時の直径を言い、また「数平均粒径」とは多数の粒子について前記の粒径を求め、この任意の100個の平均値をいう。
 一方、分散液、塗布液中の平均粒径を測定する場合には、レーザー散乱HORIBA H(株式会社堀場アドバンスドテクノ社製)を用いることができる。
From the viewpoint of dispersion stability and hiding power, the white inorganic pigment as the white inorganic pigment (coloring material for the white layer) preferably has an average primary particle diameter of 0.16 μm to 0.3 μm, and more preferably 0. A thickness of 18 μm to 0.27 μm is preferable. Further, those with 0.19 μm to 0.25 μm are particularly preferable. When the average particle size of the primary particles is 0.16 μm or more, the hiding power is high, the base of the light shielding layer becomes difficult to see, and the viscosity is hardly increased. On the other hand, when the thickness is 0.3 μm or less, the whiteness is sufficiently high, the hiding power is high at the same time, and the surface shape when applied is good.
The “average particle size of primary particles” as used herein refers to the diameter when the electron micrograph image of the particles is a circle of the same area, and the “number average particle size” refers to the above-mentioned particle size for a large number of particles. The diameter is obtained and the average value of the arbitrary 100 is referred to.
On the other hand, when measuring the average particle size in the dispersion and coating solution, laser scattering HORIBA H (manufactured by Horiba Advanced Techno Co., Ltd.) can be used.
-その他の材料-
 前記下地色層には、酸化防止剤を添加してもよい。特に前記下地色層が白色層である場合、酸化防止剤を添加することが好ましい。前記酸化防止剤としては、ヒンダードフェノール系、セミヒンダードフェノール系、燐酸系、分子内に燐酸/ヒンダードフェノールを持つハイブリッド型酸化防止剤が使用できる。
 本発明に用いることができる酸化防止剤は、着色を抑制する観点から、燐酸系酸化防止剤、例えばIRGAFOS168(BASF社製)が好ましい。
-Other materials-
An antioxidant may be added to the base color layer. In particular, when the base color layer is a white layer, it is preferable to add an antioxidant. As the antioxidant, a hindered phenol, semi-hindered phenol, phosphoric acid, or a hybrid antioxidant having phosphoric acid / hindered phenol in the molecule can be used.
The antioxidant that can be used in the present invention is preferably a phosphoric acid antioxidant, for example, IRGAFOS168 (manufactured by BASF) from the viewpoint of suppressing coloring.
 また、前記下地色層を塗布により製造する際の溶剤としては、特開2011-95716号公報の段落[0043]~[0044]に記載の溶剤を用いることができる。
 溶剤としては、エステル類、例えば酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、酢酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、アルキルエステル類、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル、並びに、3-オキシプロピオン酸メチル及び3-オキシプロピオン酸エチルなどの3-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル)、並びに、2-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸エチル、及び2-オキシプロピオン酸プロピルなどの2-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル)、並びに、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等;
In addition, as a solvent for producing the base color layer by coating, the solvents described in paragraphs [0043] to [0044] of JP 2011-95716 A can be used.
Solvents include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, alkyl esters, methyl lactate, lactic acid Ethyl, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, and methyl 3-oxypropionate and ethyl 3-oxypropionate 3-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters (for example, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate), and 2-oxypropionic acid 2-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters such as til, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, and propyl 2-oxypropionate (eg, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, Methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate, methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, 2-ethoxy -Ethyl 2-methylpropionate), and methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate and the like;
エーテル類、例えばジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールプロピルエーテルアセテート等; Ethers such as diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol propyl ether acetate, etc .;
ケトン類、例えばメチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等; Ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone and the like;
芳香族炭化水素類、例えばトルエン、キシレン;等が挙げられる。 Aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene;
 これらのうち、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、キシレン、シクロヘキサノン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート等が好適である。
 溶剤は、単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
Of these, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, xylene, cyclohexanone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and the like are preferable.
A solvent may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
 さらに、前記下地色層には、その他の添加剤を用いてもよい。前記その他の添加剤としては、例えば特許第4502784号公報の段落[0017]、特開2009-237362号公報の段落[0060]~[0071]に記載の界面活性剤や、特許第4502784号公報の段落[0018]に記載の熱重合防止剤、さらに、特開2000-310706号公報の段落[0058]~[0071]に記載のその他の添加剤が挙げられる。前記界面活性剤としては、市販のものを用いてもよく、例えば、メガファックF553、メガファックF554、メガファックF556、メガファックF557、メガファックF559、メガファックF561、メガファックF-780F(DIC株式会社製)などを用いることができる。 Further, other additives may be used for the base color layer. Examples of the other additives include surfactants described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784, paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of JP-A-2009-237362, and Japanese Patent No. 4502784. Examples include the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph [0018], and other additives described in paragraphs [0058] to [0071] of JP-A No. 2000-310706. As the surfactant, commercially available ones may be used. For example, MegaFuck F553, MegaFuck F554, MegaFuck F556, MegaFuck F557, MegaFuck F559, MegaFuck F561, MegaFuck F-780F (DIC stock) Etc.) can be used.
-下地色層の厚み-
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、下地色層が白色層である場合、前記下地色層の膜厚が、10μm~40μmであることが、前記下地色層の隠蔽力を高めるための観点から、好ましい。下地色層が白色層の場合、前記下地色層の厚みは15~40μmが更に好ましく、20~38μmが特に好ましい。
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、下地色層が金属光沢層の場合、前記下地色層の厚みは100~2000Åの範囲であることが好ましく、より好ましくは200~800Åの範囲、さらに好ましくは300~600Åの範囲である。
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、下地色層が白色層および金属光沢層以外の他色の場合は前記下地色層の厚みは1~10μmが好ましい。
-Thickness of ground color layer-
In the substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention, when the base color layer is a white layer, the thickness of the base color layer is 10 μm to 40 μm. Therefore, it is preferable. When the base color layer is a white layer, the thickness of the base color layer is more preferably 15 to 40 μm, and particularly preferably 20 to 38 μm.
In the substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention, when the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, the thickness of the base color layer is preferably in the range of 100 to 2000 mm, more preferably in the range of 200 to 800 mm, and still more preferably. Is in the range of 300-600 cm.
In the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention, when the background color layer is a color other than the white layer and the metallic luster layer, the thickness of the background color layer is preferably 1 to 10 μm.
(遮光層)
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、前記支持体と前記下地色層の間に遮光層を有することが、裏側が透けることを避ける観点から、好ましい。特に、感光性樹脂層や下地色層の色が黒色や灰色ではない場合は、遮光層を設けることが好ましい。
 具体的には、支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料を用いる場合、前記加飾材形成用積層材料の前記支持体と前記下地色層の間に遮光層を有することが好ましい。
 支持体上に下地色層ならびに感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を用いる場合、前記加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記支持体と前記下地色層の間に遮光層を有することが好ましい。
 支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料を用いる場合、前記他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記支持体と前記下地色層の間に遮光層を有することが好ましい。
(Light shielding layer)
The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has a light-shielding layer between the said support body and the said base color layer from a viewpoint of avoiding that a back side is transparent. In particular, when the color of the photosensitive resin layer or the base color layer is not black or gray, it is preferable to provide a light shielding layer.
Specifically, when using a decorative material-forming laminated material having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support, the support and the base color layer of the decorative material-forming laminated material are used. It is preferable to have a light shielding layer in between.
In the case of using a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material having a decorative material pattern in this order, which is obtained by exposing and developing a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer on a support, the decorative material pattern-containing additive is used. It is preferable to have a light shielding layer between the said support body of the laminated material for decorating material formation, and the said base color layer.
When using another decorative material forming laminate material having a base color layer on the support, it may have a light shielding layer between the support and the base color layer of the other decorative material forming laminate material. preferable.
-遮光層用の色材-
 前記遮光層用の色材としては、顔料が好ましく、黒色顔料がより好ましい。前記黒色顔料としては、例えば、カーボンブラック、チタンブラック、チタンカーボン、酸化鉄、酸化チタン、黒鉛などが挙げられ、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板では前記遮光層が酸化チタンおよびカーボンブラックのうち少なくとも一つを含むことが好ましく、カーボンブラックがより好ましい。
-Color material for light shielding layer-
As the color material for the light shielding layer, a pigment is preferable, and a black pigment is more preferable. Examples of the black pigment include carbon black, titanium black, titanium carbon, iron oxide, titanium oxide, and graphite. In the substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention, the light shielding layer is made of titanium oxide and carbon black. It is preferable to include at least one, and carbon black is more preferable.
-シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂-
 前記遮光層はシロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂を含むことが好ましい。但し、本発明の趣旨に反しない限りにおいて前記遮光層中にその他のバインダー樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 前記遮光層に用いることができる、前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂や前記顔料以外の成分としては、前記下地色層に用いることができるものとそれぞれ同様である。
 前記遮光層中に含まれる前記顔料以外の成分に対するシロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の割合が60質量%以上であることが本発明の効果を得る観点から好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
 さらに、前記下地色層中に含まれる前記顔料以外の成分に対する前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の割合が90質量%以上であり、かつ、前記遮光層中に含まれる前記顔料以外の成分に対する前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の割合が70質量%以上であることが好ましい。この場合のより好ましい範囲は、前記下地色層または前記遮光層中におけるより特に好ましい範囲、よりさらに特に好ましい範囲と同様である。
-Resin with siloxane bond in the main chain-
The light shielding layer preferably contains a resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain. However, as long as it is not contrary to the gist of the present invention, the light shielding layer may contain other binder resin.
Components other than the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain and the pigment that can be used for the light shielding layer are the same as those that can be used for the base color layer.
From the viewpoint of obtaining the effects of the present invention, the ratio of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain with respect to components other than the pigment contained in the light shielding layer is preferably 60% by mass or more, and 70% by mass or more. More preferred.
Furthermore, the ratio of the resin having the siloxane bond in the main chain with respect to components other than the pigment contained in the base color layer is 90% by mass or more, and with respect to components other than the pigment contained in the light shielding layer The ratio of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain is preferably 70% by mass or more. The more preferable range in this case is the same as the more particularly preferable range in the ground color layer or the light shielding layer, and the still more preferable range.
-その他の材料-
 前記遮光層に用いることができるその他の材料としては、前記下地色層に用いることができる材料を挙げることができ、その他の材料の好ましい範囲も前記下地色層に用いることができる材料の好ましい範囲と同様である。
-Other materials-
Examples of other materials that can be used for the light-shielding layer include materials that can be used for the base color layer. Preferred ranges of other materials are also preferable ranges of materials that can be used for the base color layer. It is the same.
-遮光層の厚み-
 前記遮光層の膜厚が、1.0μm~5.0μmであることが、前記遮光層の隠蔽力を高めるための観点から、好ましい。
 前記遮光層の厚みは1.0~4.0μmが更に好ましく、1.5~3.0μmが特に好ましい。
-Thickness of light shielding layer-
The thickness of the light shielding layer is preferably 1.0 μm to 5.0 μm from the viewpoint of enhancing the hiding power of the light shielding layer.
The thickness of the light shielding layer is more preferably from 1.0 to 4.0 μm, particularly preferably from 1.5 to 3.0 μm.
(透明接着層)
 本発明の製造方法は、前記下地色層が金属光沢層であり、前記金属光沢層に隣接して、かつ前記支持体とは反対側の表面に透明接着層を有することが好ましい。
 前記透明接着層としては特に制限はないが、前記透明接着層は透明性が高いことが好ましく、前記金属光沢層、感光性樹脂層および白色感光性樹脂層との接着性が高いことが好ましく、耐熱性が高いことが好ましい。
(Transparent adhesive layer)
In the production method of the present invention, it is preferable that the base color layer is a metallic gloss layer, and has a transparent adhesive layer on the surface adjacent to the metallic gloss layer and opposite to the support.
The transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but the transparent adhesive layer preferably has high transparency, and preferably has high adhesiveness with the metallic gloss layer, the photosensitive resin layer, and the white photosensitive resin layer, It is preferable that heat resistance is high.
-シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂-
 前記透明接着層は、バインダー樹脂を含むことが好ましい。前記バインダー樹脂としてはシロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂を含むことがより好ましい。但し、本発明の趣旨に反しない限りにおいて前記透明接着層中にその他のバインダー樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 前記透明接着層に用いることができる前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の例および好ましい範囲は、前記下地色層に用いるシロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の例および好ましい範囲と同様である。前記シロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂としては、市販のものを用いてもよく、KR251、X40-9246(以上、信越シリコーン(株)製)が密着性や加工適性の観点から好ましく、KR251およびX40-9246(以上、信越シリコーン(株)製)の2種混合がより好ましい。
 前記透明接着層に対するシロキサン結合を主鎖に有する樹脂の割合が60質量%以上であることが透明性、前記金属光沢層との接着性、耐熱性を得る観点から好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが特に好ましく、90質量%以上であることがより特に好ましい。
-Resin with siloxane bond in the main chain-
The transparent adhesive layer preferably contains a binder resin. More preferably, the binder resin includes a resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain. However, other binder resins may be included in the transparent adhesive layer as long as not departing from the spirit of the present invention.
Examples and preferred ranges of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain that can be used in the transparent adhesive layer are the same as those of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain used in the base color layer. As the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain, a commercially available resin may be used, and KR251, X40-9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion and processability. KR251 and X40 Two types of mixture of −9246 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) are more preferable.
The ratio of the resin having a siloxane bond in the main chain to the transparent adhesive layer is preferably 60% by mass or more from the viewpoint of obtaining transparency, adhesion to the metallic luster layer, and heat resistance, and is 70% by mass or more. It is more preferable that it is 80 mass% or more, and it is especially preferable that it is 90 mass% or more.
-その他の材料-
 前記透明接着層は、その他の添加剤を含んでいてもよい。その他の添加剤の例および好ましい範囲は、前記下地色層に用いるその他の添加剤の例および好ましい範囲と同様である。その中でも、前記透明接着層は界面活性剤を含むことが好ましい。前記界面活性剤としては、市販のものを用いてもよく、例えば、メガファックF-559(DIC株式会社製)などを用いることができる。
-Other materials-
The transparent adhesive layer may contain other additives. Examples and preferred ranges of other additives are the same as examples and preferred ranges of other additives used for the base color layer. Among them, the transparent adhesive layer preferably contains a surfactant. As the surfactant, a commercially available one may be used. For example, Megafac F-559 (manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be used.
-透明接着層の厚み-
 前記透明接着層の膜厚は特に制限はないが、1.0μm~40μmであることが好ましく、5~30μmであることがより好ましく、10~20μmであることが特に好ましい。
-Thickness of transparent adhesive layer-
The thickness of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.0 μm to 40 μm, more preferably 5 to 30 μm, and particularly preferably 10 to 20 μm.
(熱可塑性樹脂層)
 本発明の製造方法は、前記条件(N)を満たす場合における支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料は、熱可塑性樹脂層を少なくとも1層有していてもよい。該熱可塑性樹脂層は、前記支持体と前記下地色層との間に設けられることが好ましい。すなわち、前記他の加飾材形成用積層材料は、前記支持体、前記熱可塑性樹脂層および前記下地色層をこの順で含むことが好ましい。
 前記熱可塑性樹脂層に用いる成分としては、特開平5-72724号公報に記載されている有機高分子物質が好ましく、Vicat法(具体的にはアメリカ材料試験法ASTMD1235によるポリマー軟化点測定法)による軟化点が約80℃以下の有機高分子物質より選ばれることが特に好ましい。
(Thermoplastic resin layer)
In the production method of the present invention, in the case where the condition (N) is satisfied, the other decorative material-forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support may have at least one thermoplastic resin layer. . The thermoplastic resin layer is preferably provided between the support and the base color layer. That is, it is preferable that the said other laminated material for decorating material formation contains the said support body, the said thermoplastic resin layer, and the said base color layer in this order.
The component used for the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably an organic polymer substance described in JP-A-5-72724, which is determined by the Vicat method (specifically, the polymer softening point measurement method based on the American Material Test Method ASTM D1235). It is particularly preferable that the softening point is selected from organic polymer materials having a temperature of about 80 ° C. or lower.
 具体的には、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレンなどのポリオレフィン、エチレンと酢酸ビニル或いはそのケン化物の様なエチレン共重合体、エチレンとアクリル酸エステル或いはそのケン化物、ポリ塩化ビニル、塩化ビニルと酢酸ビニル及びそのケン化物の様な塩化ビニル共重合体、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、塩化ビニリデン共重合体、ポリスチレン、スチレンと(メタ)アクリル酸エステル或いはそのケン化物の様なスチレン共重合体、ポリビニルトルエン、ビニルトルエンと(メタ)アクリル酸エステル或いはそのケン化物の様なビニルトルエン共重合体、ポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブチルと酢酸ビニル等の(メタ)アクリル酸エステル共重合体、酢酸ビニル共重合体ナイロン、共重合ナイロン、N-アルコキシメチル化ナイロン、N-ジメチルアミノ化ナイロンの様なポリアミド樹脂等の有機高分子が挙げられる。 Specifically, polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, ethylene copolymers such as ethylene and vinyl acetate or saponified products thereof, ethylene and acrylic acid esters or saponified products thereof, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride and vinyl acetate and saponified products thereof. Vinyl chloride copolymer such as fluoride, polyvinylidene chloride, vinylidene chloride copolymer, polystyrene, styrene copolymer such as styrene and (meth) acrylic acid ester or saponified product thereof, polyvinyl toluene, vinyl toluene and (meta ) Vinyl toluene copolymer such as acrylic ester or saponified product thereof, poly (meth) acrylic ester, (meth) acrylic ester copolymer such as butyl (meth) acrylate and vinyl acetate, vinyl acetate copolymer Combined nylon, copolymer nylon, N-alkoxy Chill nylon, and organic polymeric polyamide resins such as N- dimethylamino nylon.
 熱可塑性樹脂層の厚みは6~100μmが好ましく、6~50μmがより好ましい。熱可塑性樹脂層の厚みが6~100μmの範囲では、基板上に凹凸がある場合であっても該凹凸を完全に吸収することができる。 The thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably 6 to 100 μm, more preferably 6 to 50 μm. When the thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is in the range of 6 to 100 μm, the unevenness can be completely absorbed even when the substrate has unevenness.
(中間層)
 本発明の製造方法で用いる、前記条件(N)を満たす場合における支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料は、複数の塗布液の塗布時、及び塗布後の保存時における成分の混合を防止する目的から、中間層を少なくとも1層有していてもよい。該中間層は、前記支持体と前記下地色層との間(前記熱可塑性樹脂層を有する場合には、該熱可塑性樹脂層と前記下地色層との間)に設けられることが好ましい。すなわち、前記他の加飾材形成用積層材料は、前記支持体、前記熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層および前記下地色層をこの順で含むことが好ましい。
 該中間層としては、特開平5-72724号公報に「分離層」として記載されている、酸素遮断機能のある酸素遮断膜を用いることが好ましく、この場合、露光時感度がアップし、露光機の時間負荷が減り、生産性が向上する。
 該酸素遮断膜は、低い酸素透過性を示し、水又はアルカリ水溶液に分散又は溶解する化合物を用いて形成されることが好ましく、公知の化合物から適宜選択することができる。これらの内、特に好ましいのは、ポリビニルアルコールとポリビニルピロリドンとの組み合わせである。
(Middle layer)
The other decorative material forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support in the case of satisfying the condition (N) used in the production method of the present invention is stored at the time of applying a plurality of coating liquids and after coating. For the purpose of preventing mixing of components at the time, at least one intermediate layer may be provided. The intermediate layer is preferably provided between the support and the base color layer (in the case of having the thermoplastic resin layer, between the thermoplastic resin layer and the base color layer). That is, it is preferable that the other decorative material-forming laminated material includes the support, the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer, and the base color layer in this order.
As the intermediate layer, it is preferable to use an oxygen-blocking film having an oxygen-blocking function described as “separation layer” in JP-A-5-72724. This reduces the time load and improves productivity.
The oxygen barrier film is preferably formed using a compound that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution, and can be appropriately selected from known compounds. Among these, a combination of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone is particularly preferable.
 中間層の厚みは、0.1~5.0μmが好ましく、0.5~2.0μmがより好ましい。0.1~5.0μmの範囲では酸素遮断能が低下することもなく、現像時または中間層除去時に時間がかかりすぎることもない。 The thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably from 0.1 to 5.0 μm, more preferably from 0.5 to 2.0 μm. In the range of 0.1 to 5.0 μm, the oxygen blocking ability does not decrease, and it does not take too much time during development or removal of the intermediate layer.
(保護剥離層)
 前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料には、貯蔵の際の汚染や損傷から保護するために前記下地色層や前記感光性樹脂層や前記加飾材パターンを覆うようにして、保護剥離層(カバーフィルムとも言う)が設けられることが好ましい。前記保護剥離層は支持体と同じか又は類似の材料からなってもよいが、前記下地色層や前記感光性樹脂層や前記加飾材パターンから容易に分離されねばならない。前記保護剥離層の材料としては例えばシリコーン紙、ポリオレフィン若しくはポリテトラフルオロエチレンシートが適当である。
(Protective release layer)
The decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material includes the base color layer, the photosensitive resin layer, and the decoration to protect against contamination and damage during storage. A protective release layer (also referred to as a cover film) is preferably provided so as to cover the material pattern. The protective release layer may be made of the same or similar material as the support, but should be easily separated from the base color layer, the photosensitive resin layer, and the decorating material pattern. Suitable materials for the protective release layer include, for example, silicone paper, polyolefin, or polytetrafluoroethylene sheet.
 前記保護剥離層のヘイズ度の最大値は3.0%以下であることが好ましく、前記白色層の現像後の白抜け発生をより効果的に抑制する観点からは、2.5%以下が好ましく、2.0%以下がより好ましく、1.0%以下が特に好ましい。 The maximum value of the haze degree of the protective release layer is preferably 3.0% or less, and from the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing the occurrence of white spots after development of the white layer, 2.5% or less is preferable. 2.0% or less is more preferable, and 1.0% or less is particularly preferable.
 前記保護剥離層の厚みは1~100μmであることが好ましく、5~50μmであることがより好ましく、10~30μmであることが特に好ましい。この厚みが1μm以上であれば前記保護剥離層の強度が十分なため、前記下地色層や感光性樹脂層にカバーフィルムを貼り合わせる際に、前記保護剥離層が破断しにくい。100μm以下であると前記保護剥離層の価格が高くならず、また、前記保護剥離層をラミネートする際にシワが発生しにくい。 The thickness of the protective release layer is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 5 to 50 μm, and particularly preferably 10 to 30 μm. If the thickness is 1 μm or more, the strength of the protective release layer is sufficient, so that the protective release layer is not easily broken when a cover film is bonded to the base color layer or the photosensitive resin layer. When the thickness is 100 μm or less, the price of the protective release layer does not increase, and wrinkles are unlikely to occur when the protective release layer is laminated.
 このような保護剥離層は市販のものとして、例えば、王子製紙(株)製アルファンMA-410、E-200C、E-501、信越フィルム(株)製等のポリプロピレンフィルム、帝人(株)製PS-25等のPSシリーズなどのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム等が挙げられるがこれに限られたものではない。また、市販のフィルムをサンドブラスト加工することにより、簡単に製造することが可能である。 Such protective release layers are commercially available, for example, polypropylene films such as Alfane MA-410, E-200C, E-501, Shin-Etsu Film Co., Ltd. manufactured by Oji Paper Co., Ltd., manufactured by Teijin Limited. A polyethylene terephthalate film such as PS series such as PS-25 is exemplified, but not limited thereto. Moreover, it can be easily manufactured by sandblasting a commercially available film.
 前記保護剥離層としてポリエチレンフィルムなどのポリオレフィンフィルムを用いることができる。また通常前記保護剥離層として用いられるポリオレフィンフィルムは、原材料を熱溶融し、混練、押し出し、2軸延伸、キャスティングまたはインフレーション法によって製造される。 A polyolefin film such as a polyethylene film can be used as the protective release layer. The polyolefin film usually used as the protective release layer is produced by heat-melting raw materials, kneading, extrusion, biaxial stretching, casting or inflation.
 以上、本発明に用いることができる加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を説明したが、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料は、必要に応じてネガ型材料又はポジ型材料であってもよい。 As mentioned above, although the laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation which can be used for this invention was demonstrated, the said laminated material for decorating material forming or decorating material pattern containing decorating The material-forming laminated material may be a negative material or a positive material as necessary.
-加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の製造方法-
 以上で説明した加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を製造する方法としては、特に限定はないが、例えば特開2005-3861号公報の段落[0064]~[0066]に記載の工程によって製造することができる。また、加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料は、例えば特開2009-116078号公報に記載の方法で作成することもできる。
 加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の製造方法の一例としては、支持体上に樹脂組成物を塗布し、乾燥させて下地色層を形成する工程と、形成された前記着色層を前記保護剥離層で覆う工程と、を有して構成される方法が挙げられる。
 本発明に用いることができる加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料では、本発明の趣旨に反しない限りにおいてさらにその他の層を形成してもよい。また、下地色層の形成前に、熱可塑性樹脂層及び/又は中間層(酸素遮断層)を熱可塑性樹脂層形成用の塗布液及び/又は中間層形成用の塗布液を塗布することにより形成してもよい。
 支持体上に、前記感光性樹脂層形成用の組成物、前記下地色層形成用の組成物、前記熱可塑性樹脂層形成用の塗布液、前記中間層形成用の塗布液を塗布する方法としては公知の塗布方法を用いることができる。例えば、スピナー、ホワイラー、ローラーコーター、カーテンコーター、ナイフコーター、ワイヤーバーコーター、エクストルーダー等の塗布機を用いて、それらの塗液を塗布し、乾燥させることにより形成できる。
-Manufacturing method of decorative material forming laminate material or decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material-
The method for producing the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material described above is not particularly limited, but for example, paragraph [0064] of JP-A-2005-3861 To [0066]. Further, the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material can also be prepared by the method described in, for example, JP-A-2009-116072.
As an example of a method for producing a decorative material-forming laminated material or a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material, a step of applying a resin composition on a support and drying to form a base color layer; And a step of covering the formed colored layer with the protective release layer.
In the laminated material for forming a decorative material or the laminated material for forming a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material that can be used in the present invention, other layers may be formed as long as it does not contradict the gist of the present invention. Further, before forming the base color layer, the thermoplastic resin layer and / or the intermediate layer (oxygen barrier layer) is formed by applying a coating solution for forming the thermoplastic resin layer and / or a coating solution for forming the intermediate layer. May be.
As a method of applying the photosensitive resin layer forming composition, the base color layer forming composition, the thermoplastic resin layer forming coating solution, and the intermediate layer forming coating solution on a support. A known coating method can be used. For example, it can be formed by applying and drying these coating liquids using a coating machine such as a spinner, a wheeler, a roller coater, a curtain coater, a knife coater, a wire bar coater, or an extruder.
 前記保護剥離層で前記感光性樹脂層、下地色層または加飾材パターンを覆う方法としては特に限定はないが、支持体上の感光性樹脂層、下地色層または加飾材パターンに前記保護剥離層を重ね、圧着する方法を用いることができる。
 圧着には、ラミネーター、真空ラミネーター、および、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用することができる。
 前記圧着の条件としては、雰囲気温度20~45℃、線圧1000~10000N/mが好ましい。
The method for covering the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern with the protective release layer is not particularly limited, but the protection is applied to the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern on the support. A method in which the release layers are stacked and pressure-bonded can be used.
For the pressure bonding, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, or an auto-cut laminator capable of further improving productivity can be used.
The pressure bonding conditions are preferably an atmospheric temperature of 20 to 45 ° C. and a linear pressure of 1000 to 10000 N / m.
<基板>
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法に用いる基板には、種々のものを用いることが出来るが、前記基板はガラス基板またはフィルム基板であることが好ましく、光学的に歪みがないものや、透明度が高いものを用いることがより好ましい。本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法では、前記基板は、全光透過率が、80%以上であることが好ましい。
<Board>
Various substrates can be used as the substrate used in the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention, but the substrate is preferably a glass substrate or a film substrate, and has no optical distortion. It is more preferable to use one having high transparency. In the method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of the present invention, the substrate preferably has a total light transmittance of 80% or more.
 前記基板がガラスである場合は、具体的にはガラス中のカリウムイオンよりもイオン半径が小さいイオンの一部または全部をカリウムイオンに置換する化学強化処理をされてなる強化ガラスが好ましい。
 本発明で使用するガラスは特に限定されないが、JIS R3103-2(2001年)に準拠した方法で得られる歪点温度が500℃~520℃であることが好ましい。また、ガラスの変形が生じやすい当該温度付近、すなわち溶融塩の温度を490~530℃とすることが好ましい。例えば、フロート法で製造される所謂ソーダライムガラスと呼ばれるSiO2-Na2O-K2O-CaO-MgO-Al23系ガラスの表面を化学強化処理により圧縮層が形成されたものが好ましい。
When the substrate is made of glass, specifically, tempered glass obtained by chemical strengthening treatment in which some or all of ions having an ion radius smaller than potassium ions in the glass are replaced with potassium ions is preferable.
The glass used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but the strain point temperature obtained by a method according to JIS R3103-2 (2001) is preferably 500 ° C. to 520 ° C. Further, it is preferable that the temperature near the temperature at which glass is likely to be deformed, that is, the temperature of the molten salt is 490 to 530 ° C. For example, the surface of SiO 2 —Na 2 O—K 2 O—CaO—MgO—Al 2 O 3 glass called soda lime glass manufactured by the float process is formed by a chemical strengthening treatment. preferable.
 圧縮層を形成する化学強化処理としては、ガラスを溶融塩に浸漬させ、ガラス中のナトリウムイオンと溶融塩中のカリウムイオンとを交換させることで圧縮層が形成される。圧縮層は、圧縮応力値において、200~650MPaの値を有するもので、当該値を有するように、ガラスを化学強化する際に、浸漬させるための溶融塩の温度を450~550℃、浸漬時間を1時間~3時間とすることが好ましい。 As the chemical strengthening treatment for forming the compression layer, the compression layer is formed by immersing glass in a molten salt and exchanging sodium ions in the glass and potassium ions in the molten salt. The compressive layer has a compressive stress value of 200 to 650 MPa, and when the glass is chemically strengthened so as to have the value, the temperature of the molten salt to be immersed is 450 to 550 ° C. and the immersion time. Is preferably 1 hour to 3 hours.
 前記基板がフィルム基板である場合の具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート(PC)、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC)、シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)をあげることができる。
 前記基板は、ガラス、TAC、PET、PCまたはCOPから選ばれることが好ましく、ガラスまたはシクロオレフィンポリマーからなることがより好ましく、ガラスであることが特に好ましいい。
Specific materials when the substrate is a film substrate include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate (PC), triacetyl cellulose (TAC), and cycloolefin polymer (COP).
The substrate is preferably selected from glass, TAC, PET, PC or COP, more preferably made of glass or a cycloolefin polymer, and particularly preferably glass.
 また、基板表面には、種々の機能を付加しても良い。具体的には、反射防止層、防眩層、位相差層、視野角向上層、耐傷層、自己修復層、帯電防止層、防汚層、防電磁波層、導電性層をあげることができる。
 前記導電性層としては、特表2009-505358号公報に記載のものを好ましく用いることができる。
Various functions may be added to the substrate surface. Specifically, an antireflection layer, an antiglare layer, a retardation layer, a viewing angle improving layer, a scratch resistant layer, a self-healing layer, an antistatic layer, an antifouling layer, an antimagnetic wave layer, and a conductive layer can be exemplified.
As the conductive layer, those described in JP-T-2009-505358 can be preferably used.
 前記基板は、膜厚が40~200μmであることが好ましく、40~150μmであることがより好ましく、50~120μmであることが特に好ましい。 The thickness of the substrate is preferably 40 to 200 μm, more preferably 40 to 150 μm, and particularly preferably 50 to 120 μm.
 また、積層工程におけるラミネートによる感光性樹脂層または加飾材パターンの密着性を高めるために、予め基板の非接触面(静電容量型入力装置を構成する基板の表面のうち、指などの入力手段を接触させる面とは反対側の面)に表面処理を施すことができる。前記表面処理としては、シラン化合物を用いた表面処理(シランカップリング処理)を実施することが好ましい。シランカップリング剤としては、感光性樹脂と相互作用する官能基を有するものが好ましい。例えばシランカップリング液(N-β(アミノエチル)γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン0.3質量%水溶液、商品名:KBM603、信越化学(株)製)をシャワーにより20秒間吹き付け、純水シャワー洗浄する。この後、加熱により反応させる。加熱槽を用いてもよく、ラミネーターの基板予備加熱でも反応を促進できる。 In addition, in order to improve the adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer or the decorative material pattern by lamination in the lamination process, the non-contact surface of the substrate (input of a finger or the like out of the surface of the substrate constituting the capacitive input device) is performed in advance. Surface treatment can be performed on the surface opposite to the surface with which the means is brought into contact. As the surface treatment, it is preferable to perform a surface treatment (silane coupling treatment) using a silane compound. As the silane coupling agent, those having a functional group that interacts with the photosensitive resin are preferable. For example, a silane coupling solution (N-β (aminoethyl) γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane 0.3% by mass aqueous solution, trade name: KBM603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) is sprayed for 20 seconds with a shower, and pure water shower washing To do. Thereafter, the reaction is carried out by heating. A heating tank may be used, and the reaction can be promoted by preheating the substrate with a laminator.
<積層(ラミネート方法)>
 前記感光性樹脂層、下地色層または加飾材パターンの前記基板表面への積層(貼り合わせ)は、感光性樹脂層、下地色層または加飾材パターンを基板表面に重ね、加圧、加熱することにより行われる。貼り合わせには、ラミネーター、真空ラミネーター、および、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用することができる。
 ラミネート方法は、加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料と基板との間に気泡が入らない方法が、得率を上げられる観点から好ましい。
 具体的には、真空ラミネーターの使用を好ましく挙げることができる。
<Lamination (Lamination method)>
Lamination (bonding) of the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern to the substrate surface is performed by pressing the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorating material pattern on the substrate surface, and applying pressure and heating. Is done. For laminating, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further improve productivity can be used.
As the laminating method, a method in which bubbles do not enter between the decorative material forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminated material and the substrate is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the yield.
Specifically, the use of a vacuum laminator can be preferably mentioned.
 ラミネート(連続式/枚葉式)に用いられる装置としては、例えば、クライムプロダクツ株式会社製 V-SE340aaHなどを挙げることができる。
 真空ラミネーター装置としては、例えば、高野精機有限会社製のものや、大成ラミネーター株式会社製、FVJ-540R、FV700などを挙げることができる。
Examples of the apparatus used for laminating (continuous type / single-wafer type) include V-SE340aaH manufactured by Climb Products Co., Ltd.
Examples of the vacuum laminator device include those manufactured by Takano Seiki Co., Ltd., Taisei Laminator Co., Ltd., FVJ-540R, FV700, and the like.
 前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を前記基板に貼り付ける前に、前記支持体の、前記感光性樹脂層、下地色層または加飾材パターンとは反対側に、さらに他の支持体を積層する工程を含むことが、ラミネート時に気泡を入れない好ましい効果を得ることが出来ることがある。このときに用いる支持体としては特に制限はないが、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーが挙げられる。
 また、膜厚は、50~200μmの範囲で選ぶことが出来る。
Before sticking the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material to the substrate, the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer or the decorative material pattern of the support Including the step of further laminating another support on the opposite side can sometimes provide a preferable effect of preventing bubbles during lamination. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as a support body used at this time, For example, a polyethylene terephthalate, a polycarbonate, a triacetyl cellulose, a cycloolefin polymer is mentioned.
The film thickness can be selected in the range of 50 to 200 μm.
<支持体を取り除く工程>
 本発明の製造方法は、前記基板に貼り付けられた前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料から前記支持体を取り除く工程を含んでいても、含んでいなくてもよい。露光工程に影響が出ず、前記基材がガラスである場合は、外部衝撃を受けて破損したときのガラスの破片の飛散を防止できる観点から、前記基板に貼り付けられた前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料から前記支持体を取り除く工程を含まない方が好ましい。一方、露光工程を行うに際し、必要に応じて前記基板に貼り付けられた前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料から前記支持体を取り除く工程を行ってもよい。
<Step of removing the support>
The production method of the present invention may include a step of removing the support from the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material attached to the substrate. It does not have to be. If the exposure process is not affected and the base material is glass, the decorative material formed on the substrate is formed from the viewpoint of preventing scattering of glass fragments when damaged due to external impact. It is preferable not to include the step of removing the support from the laminated material for decoration or the laminated material for decorating material-containing decorative material formation. On the other hand, when performing the exposure step, the step of removing the support from the decorative material forming laminate material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material attached to the substrate as necessary is performed. Also good.
<露光工程>
 前記露光工程は、加飾材形成用積層材料の感光性樹脂層、または、基板上に積層された前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程である。また、加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料が前記下地色層や前記遮光層を有する場合、必要に応じて加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の、基板上に積層された前記下地色層や前記遮光層を露光する工程も含む。
 具体的には、前記基板に形成された前記感光性樹脂層の上方に所定の加飾材パターンを形成するためのマスクを配置し、その後該マスク、必要に応じて熱可塑性樹脂層および必要に応じて中間層を介してマスク上方から前記感光性樹脂層を露光する方法が挙げられる。なお、本発明の製造方法では前記下地色層や前記遮光層などを露光により硬化してもよく、その場合はマスクを用いずに熱可塑性樹脂層、および中間層を介して前記光硬化性樹脂層を全面露光する方法が挙げられる。
 ここで、前記露光の光源としては、前記感光性樹脂層を硬化しうる波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nmなど)を照射できるものであれば適宜選定して用いることができる。具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ等が挙げられる。露光量としては、通常5~200mJ/cm2程度であり、好ましくは10~100mJ/cm2程度である。ただし、前記感光性樹脂層が前記波長域の光を吸収する着色剤を含む場合(例えば白色顔料として酸化チタンを含む白色感光性樹脂層を用いる場合)には、露光量を増やして100~2000mJ/cm2、好ましくは300~1200mJ/cm2程度とすることが好ましい。
<Exposure process>
The said exposure process is a process of exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorating material formation, or the said photosensitive resin layer laminated | stacked on the board | substrate. Moreover, when the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decoration material formation has the said base color layer or the said light shielding layer, it is laminated | stacked on the board | substrate of the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decoration material formation as needed. And a step of exposing the base color layer and the light shielding layer.
Specifically, a mask for forming a predetermined decorating material pattern is arranged above the photosensitive resin layer formed on the substrate, and then the mask, if necessary, a thermoplastic resin layer and a necessary Accordingly, there is a method of exposing the photosensitive resin layer from above the mask through an intermediate layer. In the production method of the present invention, the base color layer, the light shielding layer, and the like may be cured by exposure. In that case, the photocurable resin is passed through a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer without using a mask. A method of exposing the entire surface of the layer can be mentioned.
Here, the light source for the exposure can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can irradiate light in a wavelength region capable of curing the photosensitive resin layer (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.). Specifically, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, etc. are mentioned. The exposure dose is usually about 5 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , preferably about 10 to 100 mJ / cm 2 . However, when the photosensitive resin layer contains a colorant that absorbs light in the wavelength range (for example, when a white photosensitive resin layer containing titanium oxide as a white pigment is used), the exposure amount is increased to 100 to 2000 mJ. / Cm 2 , preferably about 300 to 1200 mJ / cm 2 .
<現像工程>
 前記現像工程は、露光された感光性樹脂層(必要に応じて前記下地色層や前記遮光層)を現像する工程である。
 本発明では、前記現像工程は、パターン露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像液によってパターン現像する狭義の意味の現像工程ではなく、前記下地色層や前記遮光層などを全面露光後に熱可塑性樹脂層や中間層を除去するのみで前記下地色層自体や前記遮光層自体はパターンを形成しない広義の意味での現像工程の場合も含む現像工程である。
 前記現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。前記現像液としては、特に制約はなく、特開平5-72724号公報に記載のものなど、公知の現像液を使用することができる。尚、現像液は感光性樹脂層が溶解型の現像挙動をするものが好ましく、例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05~5mol/Lの濃度で含むものが好ましい。一方、前記前記下地色層自体や前記遮光層自体はパターンを形成しない場合の現像液は前記非アルカリ現像型組成物層を溶解しない型の現像挙動をするものが好ましく、例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05~5mol/Lの濃度で含むものが好ましい。現像液には、更に水と混和性を有する有機溶剤を少量添加してもよい。水と混和性を有する有機溶剤としては、メタノール、エタノール、2-プロパノール、1-プロパノール、ブタノール、ジアセトンアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテル、ベンジルアルコール、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、ε-カプロラクトン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルアセトアミド、ヘキサメチルホスホルアミド、乳酸エチル、乳酸メチル、ε-カプロラクタム、N-メチルピロリドン等を挙げることができる。該有機溶剤の濃度は0.1質量%~30質量%が好ましい。また、前記現像液には、更に公知の界面活性剤を添加することができる。界面活性剤の濃度は0.01質量%~10質量%が好ましい。
<Development process>
The developing step is a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer (the base color layer and the light shielding layer as necessary).
In the present invention, the developing step is not a developing step in a narrow sense in which the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer is pattern-developed with a developer, but a thermoplastic resin after the entire surface of the base color layer and the light-shielding layer is exposed. This is a development process including a case of a development process in a broad sense in which the base color layer itself and the light shielding layer itself do not form a pattern simply by removing a layer or an intermediate layer.
The development can be performed using a developer. The developer is not particularly limited, and known developers such as those described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. The developer preferably has a development behavior in which the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type. For example, a developer containing a compound with pKa = 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 to 5 mol / L is preferable. On the other hand, the developer in the case where the base color layer itself or the light shielding layer itself does not form a pattern preferably has a development behavior that does not dissolve the non-alkaline development type composition layer. For example, pKa = 7 to Those containing 13 compounds at a concentration of 0.05 to 5 mol / L are preferred. A small amount of an organic solvent miscible with water may be added to the developer. Examples of organic solvents miscible with water include methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, 1-propanol, butanol, diacetone alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, benzyl alcohol And acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, ε-caprolactone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, hexamethylphosphoramide, ethyl lactate, methyl lactate, ε-caprolactam, N-methylpyrrolidone and the like. The concentration of the organic solvent is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass. Further, a known surfactant can be added to the developer. The concentration of the surfactant is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass.
 前記現像の方式としては、パドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー&スピン現像、ディプ現像等の方式のいずれでもよい。ここで、前記シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の前記感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、未硬化部分を除去することができる。尚、熱可塑性樹脂層や中間層を設けた場合には、現像の前に感光性樹脂層の溶解性が低いアルカリ性の液をシャワーなどにより吹き付け、熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層などを除去しておくことが好ましい。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましく、また、現像液のpHは8~13が好ましい。 The development method may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower & spin development, dip development and the like. Here, the shower development will be described. The uncured portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the photosensitive resin layer after exposure. When a thermoplastic resin layer or an intermediate layer is provided, an alkaline solution having a low solubility of the photosensitive resin layer is sprayed by a shower before development, and the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer, etc. are removed. It is preferable to keep it. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C., and the pH of the developer is preferably 8 to 13.
 本発明の製造方法は、ポスト露光工程、ポストベーク工程等、その他の工程を有していてもよい。前記感光性樹脂層、前記下地色層、前記遮光層が、熱硬化性透明樹脂層でもある場合は、ポストベーク工程を行うことが好ましい。 The production method of the present invention may have other steps such as a post-exposure step and a post-bake step. When the photosensitive resin layer, the base color layer, and the light shielding layer are also thermosetting transparent resin layers, it is preferable to perform a post-bake process.
 尚、パターニング露光や全面露光は、加飾材形成用積層材料中または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料中の前記支持体を剥離してから行ってもよいし、前記支持体を剥離する前に露光し、その後、前記支持体を剥離してもよい。なお、以上において加飾材パターン形成のために所望のマスクを介した露光を例に説明したが、パターニング露光はマスクを介した露光でも良いし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でも良い。 The patterning exposure and the entire surface exposure may be performed after the support in the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material is peeled off. You may expose before peeling, and may peel the said support body after that. In the above, exposure through a desired mask has been described as an example for forming a decorative material pattern, but the patterning exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
<熱可塑性樹脂層を除去する工程、中間層を除去する工程>
 さらに、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料が熱可塑性樹脂層や中間層を含む場合は、熱可塑性樹脂層と中間層を除去する工程と有することが好ましい。
 前記熱可塑性樹脂層と中間層を除去する工程は、一般にフォトリソ方式で使用されるアルカリ現像液を用いて行うことができる。前記アルカリ現像液としては、前記露光された感光性樹脂層を現像する工程において、用いられる現像液を、同様に用いることができる。
<The process of removing a thermoplastic resin layer, the process of removing an intermediate | middle layer>
Furthermore, when the said laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation contains a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate | middle layer, it has a process of removing a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate | middle layer. Is preferred.
The step of removing the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer can be performed using an alkaline developer generally used in a photolithography method. As the alkaline developer, a developer used in the step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer can be used in the same manner.
 前記熱可塑性樹脂層と中間層を除去する工程の方式としては、パドル、シャワー、シャワー&スピン、ディプ等の方式のいずれでもよい。ここで、前記シャワーについて説明すると、熱可塑性樹脂層や中間層を、現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、残渣を除去することが好ましい。液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましく、また、のpHは8~13が好ましい。 The method for removing the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer may be any method such as paddle, shower, shower & spin, and dip. Here, the shower will be described. The thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer can be removed by spraying a developer with a shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C., and the pH is preferably 8 to 13.
<ポストベーク工程>
 前記積層工程後にポストベーク工程を含むことが好ましく、前記熱可塑性樹脂層と中間層を除去する工程の後にポストベークを行う工程を含むことがより好ましい。
 前記加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法は、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層(必要に応じて遮光層)を0.08~1.2atmの環境下で180~300℃に加熱して形成することが電子機器などに組み込んだ時の信頼性の生産性の両立の観点から好ましい。
 前記ポストベークの加熱は0.5atm以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、1.1atm以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、1.0atm以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。さらに、約1atm(大気圧)環境下で行うことが特別な減圧装置を用いることなく製造コストを低減できる観点からより特に好ましい。ここで、従来は前記下地色層や遮光層を加熱により硬化して形成する場合、非常に低い圧力の減圧環境下で加熱を行い、酸素濃度を低くすることでベーク後の白色度および遮光層の前記基板側の色味を維持していたが、前記加飾材形成用積層材料または加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を用いることにより、上記圧力の範囲でベークした後も本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の前記白色層および遮光層の前記基板側の色味を改善し(b値を小さくし)、白色度および遮光層の前記基板側の色味を高めることができる。
 前記ポストベークの温度は、200~280℃であることがより好ましく、220~260℃であることが特に好ましい。
 前記ポストベークの時間は、20~150分であることがより好ましく、30~100分であることが特に好ましい。
 前記ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよいが、空気環境下で行うことが、特別な減圧装置を用いることなく製造コストを低減できる観点から特に好ましい。
<Post-bake process>
It is preferable to include a post-baking step after the laminating step, and it is more preferable to include a step of performing post-baking after the step of removing the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer.
The manufacturing method of the said board | substrate with a decorating material pattern makes 0.08 the said base color layer (the light shielding layer as needed) of the said laminated material for decorating material formation or the laminated material for decorating material pattern containing decorating material formation. Forming by heating to 180 to 300 ° C. in an environment of up to 1.2 atm is preferable from the viewpoint of achieving both productivity and reliability when incorporated in an electronic device or the like.
The post-baking is more preferably performed in an environment of 0.5 atm or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out in an environment of 1.1 atm or less, and it is particularly preferred to carry out in an environment of 1.0 atm or less. Furthermore, it is more preferable to carry out in an environment of about 1 atm (atmospheric pressure) from the viewpoint of reducing the manufacturing cost without using a special decompression device. Here, conventionally, when the base color layer and the light shielding layer are cured by heating, the whiteness and the light shielding layer after baking are reduced by heating in a reduced pressure environment of a very low pressure to lower the oxygen concentration. Although the color tone of the substrate side is maintained, by using the decorative material-forming laminated material or the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminated material, the present material is baked in the above pressure range. The board | substrate side color of the said white layer of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of invention and the light shielding layer can be improved (b value is made small), and the whiteness and the color of the board | substrate side of a light shielding layer can be improved. .
The post-baking temperature is more preferably 200 to 280 ° C., and particularly preferably 220 to 260 ° C.
The post-baking time is more preferably 20 to 150 minutes, and particularly preferably 30 to 100 minutes.
The post-baking may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment, but it is particularly preferable to perform the post-bake from the viewpoint of reducing the manufacturing cost without using a special decompression device.
<その他の工程>
 本発明の製造方法は、ポスト露光工程等、その他の工程を有していてもよい。
 前記下地色層および前記遮光層が光硬化性樹脂を有する場合に前記下地色層および前記遮光層を形成するときは、ポスト露光工程を含むことが好ましい。前記ポスト露光工程は前記下地色層および前記遮光層の前記基板と接している側の表面からのみ行っても、前記透明基板と接していない側の表面からのみ行っても、両面から行ってもよい。
<Other processes>
The manufacturing method of this invention may have other processes, such as a post-exposure process.
When the base color layer and the light shielding layer have a photocurable resin, the base color layer and the light shield layer preferably include a post-exposure step. The post-exposure step may be performed only from the surface of the base color layer and the light-shielding layer that is in contact with the substrate, from only the surface that is not in contact with the transparent substrate, or from both surfaces. Good.
 なお、前記露光工程、現像工程、前記熱可塑性樹脂層と中間層を除去する工程、およびその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落番号[0035]~[0051]に記載の方法を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。 Examples of the exposure step, the development step, the step of removing the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer, and other steps are described in paragraph numbers [0035] to [0051] of JP-A-2006-23696. This method can also be suitably used in the present invention.
[加飾材パターン付き基板]
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法により製造されたことを特徴とする。
 以下、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の好ましい態様について説明する。
[Substrate with decorative material pattern]
The board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention was manufactured by the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
Hereinafter, the preferable aspect of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention is demonstrated.
<層構成>
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、基板上に加飾材パターンと下地色層をこの順で有することが好ましい。前記加飾材パターンと前記下地色層は、直接接して積層されていてもよく、他の層を介して積層されていてもよいが、前記加飾材パターンを形成するときに白色以外の感光性樹脂層を用いる場合は直接接して積層されていることが好ましい。一方、前記加飾材パターンを形成するときに白色感光性樹脂層を用いる場合は、前記下地色層が金属光沢層であり、前記加飾材パターンと前記下地色層(すなわち金属光沢層)は、前記透明接着層を介して積層されていることが好ましい。
 加飾材パターンと白色層である下地色層のみを基板に積層して加飾材とする場合、光学濃度が低い場合がある。本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板では、基板(フィルムやガラス)側より加飾材パターン、白色層である下地色層および遮光層をこの順で含む構成とすることで光漏れ等を抑えることが出来る。
<Layer structure>
It is preferable that the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has a decorating material pattern and a base color layer in this order on a board | substrate. The decorating material pattern and the base color layer may be laminated in direct contact with each other, or may be laminated through other layers, but when forming the decorating material pattern, a photosensitivity other than white is used. In the case of using a conductive resin layer, it is preferable that the layers are laminated in direct contact. On the other hand, when a white photosensitive resin layer is used when forming the decorating material pattern, the base color layer is a metallic luster layer, and the decorating material pattern and the base color layer (that is, the metallic luster layer) are It is preferable that the layers are laminated via the transparent adhesive layer.
When only a decorating material pattern and a base color layer that is a white layer are laminated on a substrate to form a decorating material, the optical density may be low. In the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention, light leakage etc. are suppressed by setting it as the structure containing the decorating material pattern, the base color layer which is a white layer, and the light shielding layer in this order from the board | substrate (film or glass) side. I can do it.
<加飾材パターン付き基板の特性>
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、加飾材パターンが高精度である。加飾材パターンが線状である場合のパターン線幅は150μm以下であることが好ましく、100μm以下であることがより好ましく、50μm以下であることが特に好ましく、20μm以下であることがより特に好ましく、15μm以下であることがさらにより特に好ましい。
<Characteristics of substrate with decorative material pattern>
The board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention has a highly accurate decorating material pattern. When the decorative material pattern is linear, the pattern line width is preferably 150 μm or less, more preferably 100 μm or less, particularly preferably 50 μm or less, and particularly preferably 20 μm or less. Even more preferably, it is 15 μm or less.
<タッチパネル>
 本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、携帯電話やスマートフォンなどの電子機器、情報表示装置の背面外装に用いられることが好ましく、特にタッチパネルを有する携帯電話やスマートフォンなどの電子機器、情報表示装置の背面外装に用いられることがより好ましい。タッチパネルとしては、静電容量型入力装置が好ましい。
 前記静電容量型入力装置、および当該静電容量型入力装置を構成要素として備えた画像表示装置は、『最新タッチパネル技術』(2009年7月6日発行(株)テクノタイムズ)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”、シーエムシー出版(2004,12)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。
<Touch panel>
The substrate with a decorative material pattern of the present invention is preferably used for the back exterior of electronic devices such as mobile phones and smartphones and information display devices, and particularly for electronic devices such as mobile phones and smartphones and information display devices having a touch panel. More preferably, it is used for the back exterior. As the touch panel, a capacitive input device is preferable.
The capacitance type input device and the image display device including the capacitance type input device as a component are “latest touch panel technology” (Techno Times, issued on July 6, 2009), supervised by Yuji Mitani. The configurations disclosed in “Technology and Development of Touch Panels”, CMC Publishing (2004, 12), FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 Lecture Textbook, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Application Note AN2292, and the like can be applied.
 タッチパネルを使用することができる情報表示装置としては、モバイル機器が好ましく、例えば、以下の情報表示装置を挙げることができる。
 iPhone4、iPad(以上、米国 アップル社製)、Xperia(SO-01B)(ソニー・エリクソン・モバイルコミュニケーション社製)、Galaxy S(SC-02B)、Galaxy Tab(SC-01C)(以上、韓国 サムスン電子社製)、BlackBerry 8707h(加国 リサーチ・イン・モーション社製)、Kindle(米国 アマゾン社製)、Kobo Touch(楽天株式会社製)。
The information display device that can use the touch panel is preferably a mobile device, and examples thereof include the following information display devices.
iPhone4, iPad (above made by Apple Inc., USA), Xperia (SO-01B) (produced by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications), Galaxy S (SC-02B), Galaxy Tab (SC-01C) (above, Samsung Electronics Korea) BlackBerry 8707h (manufactured by Kankoku Research in Motion), Kindle (manufactured by Amazon, USA), Kobo Touch (manufactured by Rakuten, Inc.).
 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を更に具体的に説明する。下記実施例に示す材料、試薬、割合、機器、操作等は、本発明の範囲から逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができ、したがって本発明は以下に示す実施例に限定されるものではない。なお、下記実施例において、特に断りのない限り、「%」及び「部」はいずれも質量基準であり、分子量は重量平均分子量を表す。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The materials, reagents, ratios, instruments, operations, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the scope of the present invention, and therefore the present invention is not limited to the examples shown below. In the following examples, unless otherwise specified, both “%” and “part” are based on mass, and the molecular weight represents a weight average molecular weight.
[製造例1]
<黒色着色液1および白色着色液1の調製>
 下記表1に記載の黒色着色液1、白色着色液1を、以下の材料を用いて調製した。表中、黒色着色液1および白色着色液1の欄に記載の数値は「質量部」を表す。
[Production Example 1]
<Preparation of black colored liquid 1 and white colored liquid 1>
A black colored liquid 1 and a white colored liquid 1 described in Table 1 below were prepared using the following materials. In the table, the numerical values described in the columns of the black colored liquid 1 and the white colored liquid 1 represent “parts by mass”.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
・黒色分散液1(GB4016、山陽色素株式会社製、下記組成)
黒色顔料(カーボンブラック)           25.0質量%
分散助剤                      9.5質量%
分散溶媒(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート) 65.5質量%
Black dispersion 1 (GB4016, manufactured by Sanyo Pigment Co., Ltd., the following composition)
Black pigment (carbon black) 25.0 mass%
Dispersing aid 9.5% by mass
Dispersing solvent (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate) 65.5% by mass
・白色分散液(FP White B422、山陽色素株式会社製、下記組成)
白色顔料(二酸化チタン)             70.0質量%
分散助剤                      3.5質量%
分散溶媒(メチルエチルケトン)          26.5質量%
・ White dispersion (FP White B422, manufactured by Sanyo Dye Co., Ltd., the following composition)
White pigment (titanium dioxide) 70.0 mass%
Dispersing aid 3.5% by mass
Dispersing solvent (methyl ethyl ketone) 26.5% by mass
・シリコーン樹脂溶液1(KR300、信越シリコーン株式会社製、下記組成)
シリコーン樹脂のキシレン溶液(固形分50質量%)
-Silicone resin solution 1 (KR300, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., the following composition)
Xylene solution of silicone resin (solid content 50% by mass)
・シリコーン樹脂溶液2(KR311、信越シリコーン株式会社製、下記組成)
シリコーン樹脂のキシレン溶液(固形分60質量%)
・ Silicone resin solution 2 (KR311, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., the following composition)
Xylene solution of silicone resin (solid content 60% by mass)
・塗布助剤(メガファックF-780F、DIC株式会社製、下記組成)
界面活性剤                      30質量%
メチルエチルケトン                  70質量%
・ Coating aid (Megafac F-780F, manufactured by DIC Corporation, composition shown below)
30% by weight of surfactant
Methyl ethyl ketone 70% by mass
・アクリル樹脂溶液(下記組成)
ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸ランダム共重合体
(モル比78/22、重量平均分子量 38,000) 27質量%
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセタート  73質量%
・ Acrylic resin solution (the following composition)
Benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid random copolymer (molar ratio 78/22, weight average molecular weight 38,000) 27% by mass
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 73% by mass
・アクリルモノマー溶液(日本化薬株式会社製、下記組成)
ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート    76質量%
プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセタート24質量%
・ Acrylic monomer solution (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., following composition)
Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate 76% by mass
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 24% by mass
・光重合開始剤(IRGACURE379EG、BASF社製、下記化合物)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Photopolymerization initiator (IRGACURE 379EG, manufactured by BASF, the following compound)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
・重合禁止剤(フェノチアジン、下記化合物)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
・ Polymerization inhibitor (phenothiazine, the following compounds)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
・有機溶媒1(メチルエチルケトン) ・ Organic solvent 1 (methyl ethyl ketone)
<白色着色液2の調製>
 以下の材料を用いて白色着色液2を調製した。
(白色着色液2:処方)
・白色顔料分散液(FP WHITE B422、山陽色素(株)、下記組成)16.7質量部
 - 白色顔料(二酸化チタン)     70.0質量%
 - 分散助剤              3.5質量%
 - 分散溶媒(メチルエチルケトン)  26.5質量%
・メチルエチルケトン              2.06質量部
・シリコーン樹脂溶液3(KR251、信越シリコーン(株)製、シリコーン樹脂の固形分20質量%トルエン溶液)78.8質量部
・シリコーン樹脂溶液4(X40-9246 信越シリコーン(株)製、シリコーンオリゴマー)            1.75質量部
・D-15 信越シリコーン(株)製(シリコーンレジン用触媒、亜鉛含有触媒のキシレン溶液(固形分50質量%))
                        0.700質量部
・メガファックF559 大日本インキ化学工業製 0.120質量部
<Preparation of white coloring liquid 2>
White coloring liquid 2 was prepared using the following materials.
(White colored liquid 2: prescription)
White pigment dispersion (FP WHITE B422, Sanyo Dye Co., Ltd., the following composition) 16.7 parts by mass-White pigment (titanium dioxide) 70.0% by mass
-Dispersing aid 3.5% by weight
-Dispersion solvent (methyl ethyl ketone) 26.5% by weight
・ Methyl ethyl ketone 2.06 parts by mass ・ Silicone resin solution 3 (KR251, Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., solid resin 20 mass% toluene solution) 78.8 parts by mass ・ Silicone resin solution 4 (X40-9246 Shin-Etsu Silicone ( Co., Ltd., silicone oligomer) 1.75 parts by mass D-15 Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd. (silicone resin catalyst, zinc-containing catalyst xylene solution (solid content 50 mass%))
0.700 parts by mass, MegaFuck F559 0.120 parts by mass, manufactured by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.
[製造例2]
<緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1の調製>
 下記処方で緑色(G)用分散液(G-1)を調製した。
・Pigment Green 36(SEM観察における平均粒子径47nm) 11部
・Pigment Yellow150(SEM観察における平均粒子径39nm) 7部
・下記分散樹脂A-3の溶液                 5部
・分散剤
(商品名:Disperbyk-161、ビックケミー社製 30%溶液)   3部
・アルカリ可溶性樹脂:ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体(=85/15[mol比]共重合体、分子量30,000、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶液(固形分:50質量%))            11部
・溶剤:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート   70部
[Production Example 2]
<Preparation of coating liquid CG-1 for forming a green (G) photosensitive resin layer>
A dispersion for green (G) (G-1) was prepared according to the following formulation.
Pigment Green 36 (average particle size 47 nm in SEM observation) 11 parts Pigment Yellow 150 (average particle size 39 nm in SEM observation) 7 parts Solution 5 parts of the following dispersion resin A-3 Dispersant (trade name: Disperbyk-161 3 parts, alkali-soluble resin: benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer (= 85/15 [mol ratio] copolymer, molecular weight 30,000, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution (solid content) : 50 mass%)) 11 parts ・ Solvent: 70 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
 上記各成分を3000rpmの条件でホモジナイザーを用いて1時間撹拌した。得られた混合溶液を、0.3mmジルコニアビーズを用いたビーズ分散機(商品名:ディスパーマット、GETZMANN社製)にて8時間微分散処理を施し、緑色(G)用分散液(G-1)を得た。得られた緑色(G)用分散液(G-1)中の分散粒子をSEMで観察したところ平均粒子径は32nmであった。 The above components were stirred for 1 hour using a homogenizer under the condition of 3000 rpm. The obtained mixed solution was finely dispersed for 8 hours with a bead disperser (trade name: Dispermat, manufactured by GETZMANN) using 0.3 mm zirconia beads, and a green (G) dispersion (G-1 ) When the dispersed particles in the obtained green (G) dispersion liquid (G-1) were observed with an SEM, the average particle diameter was 32 nm.
 得られた緑色(G)用分散液(G-1)を用いて、下記処方で緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1を調製した。
・緑色(G)用分散液(G-1)             100部
・エポキシ樹脂:(商品名EHPE3150 ダイセル化学工業社製)2部
・重合性化合物:ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ・ヘキサアクリレート8部
・重合性化合物:ペンタエリスリトールのテトラ(エトキシアクリレート)   2部
・重合開始剤:1,3-ビストリハロメチル-5-ベンゾオキソラントリアジン 2部
・重合開始剤:2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-ブタノン-1                       1部
・重合開始剤:ジエチルチオキサントン            0.5部
・重合禁止剤:p-メトキシフェノール          0.001部
・フッ素系界面活性剤(商品名:Megafac R08 大日本インキ化学工業社製)                     0.02部
・ノニオン系界面活性剤(商品名:エマルゲンA-60 花王社製)    0.5部
・溶剤:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート  120部
・溶剤:プロピレングリコールn-プロピルエーテルアセテート  30部
 上記組成を混合撹拌し、緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1を得た。
Using the obtained green (G) dispersion liquid (G-1), a green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating liquid CG-1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
-Green (G) dispersion (G-1) 100 parts-Epoxy resin: 2 parts (trade name EHPE3150 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries)-Polymerizable compound: Dipentaerythritol penta-hexaacrylate 8 parts-Polymerizable compound: Tetra (ethoxy acrylate) 2 parts of pentaerythritol, polymerization initiator: 1,3-bistrihalomethyl-5-benzooxolantolyazine 2 parts, polymerization initiator: 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4- Morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1 1 part ・ Polymerization initiator: diethylthioxanthone 0.5 part ・ Polymerization inhibitor: 0.001 part of p-methoxyphenol ・ Fluorosurfactant (trade name: Megafac R08 Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Kogyo Co., Ltd.) 0.02 part, nonionic Surfactant (trade name: Emulgen A-60, manufactured by Kao Corporation) 0.5 parts, solvent: 120 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, solvent: 30 parts of propylene glycol n-propyl ether acetate G) A coating solution CG-1 for forming a photosensitive resin layer was obtained.
-分散樹脂A-3の合成-
(1.連鎖移動剤A3の合成)
 ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)〔DPMP;堺化学工業(株)製〕(下記化合物(33))7.83部、及び吸着部位を有し、かつ炭素-炭素二重結合を有する下記化合物(m-6)4.55部を、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル28.90部に溶解させ、窒素気流下、70℃に加熱した。これに、2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)〔V-65、和光純薬工業(株)製〕0.04部を加えて3時間加熱した。更に、V-65を0.04部加え、窒素気流下、70℃で3時間反応させた。得られた反応液を室温まで冷却することで、以下に示すメルカプタン化合物(連鎖移動剤A3)の30%溶液を得た。
-Synthesis of Dispersing Resin A-3-
(1. Synthesis of chain transfer agent A3)
Dipentaerythritol hexakis (3-mercaptopropionate) [DPMP; manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.] (the following compound (33)) 7.83 parts, and having an adsorption site and a carbon-carbon double bond The following compound (m-6) (4.55 parts) having the following formula was dissolved in 28.90 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether and heated to 70 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. To this was added 0.04 part of 2,2′-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) [V-65, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] and heated for 3 hours. Further, 0.04 part of V-65 was added and reacted at 70 ° C. for 3 hours under a nitrogen stream. By cooling the obtained reaction liquid to room temperature, a 30% solution of a mercaptan compound (chain transfer agent A3) shown below was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
(2.分散樹脂A-3の合成)
 前記のようにして得られた連鎖移動剤A3の30%溶液4.99部、メタクリル酸メチル19.0部、メタクリル酸1.0部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル4.66部の混合溶液を、窒素気流下、90℃に加熱した。この混合溶液を攪拌しながら、2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル〔V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕0.139部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル5.36部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート9.40部の混合溶液を2.5時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了してから、得られた溶液を90℃で2.5時間反応させた後、ここに2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル0.046部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート4.00部の混合溶液を投入し、更に2時間反応させた。得られた反応液にプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル1.52部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート21.7部を加え、室温まで冷却することで分散樹脂A-3(ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量24000)の溶液(分散樹脂30質量%、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル21質量%、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート49質量%)を得た。
 この分散樹脂A-3の酸価は48mg/gであった。分散樹脂A-3の構造を以下に示す。
(2. Synthesis of dispersion resin A-3)
A mixed solution of 4.99 parts of a 30% solution of chain transfer agent A3 obtained as described above, 19.0 parts of methyl methacrylate, 1.0 part of methacrylic acid, and 4.66 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was added to nitrogen. It heated to 90 degreeC under airflow. While stirring this mixed solution, 0.139 part of dimethyl 2,2′-azobisisobutyrate [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.], 5.36 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 9 40 parts of the mixed solution was added dropwise over 2.5 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the resulting solution was reacted at 90 ° C. for 2.5 hours, and then a mixed solution of 0.046 part of dimethyl 2,2′-azobisisobutyrate and 4.00 part of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate. The reaction was continued for another 2 hours. To the obtained reaction liquid, 1.52 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether and 21.7 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate were added and cooled to room temperature, whereby a solution of dispersion resin A-3 (polystyrene equivalent weight average molecular weight 24000) ( Dispersion resin 30 mass%, propylene glycol monomethyl ether 21 mass%, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 49 mass%) was obtained.
The acid value of this dispersion resin A-3 was 48 mg / g. The structure of Dispersing Resin A-3 is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
[製造例3]
 熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液を調製した。
(熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液:処方H1)
・メタノール                  :11.1質量部
・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート:6.36質量部
・メチルエチルケトン              :52.4質量部
・メチルメタクリレート/2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート/ベンジル メタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体(共重合組成比(モル比)= 55/11.7/4.5/28.8、分子量=10万、Tg≒70℃)                  :5.83質量部
・スチレン/アクリル酸共重合体(共重合組成比(モル比)=63/37、 重量平均分子量=1万、Tg≒100℃)     :13.6質量部
・モノマー1(商品名:BPE-500、新中村化学工業(株)製):9.1質量部
・塗布助剤                   :0.54質量部
 なお、熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液H1の溶剤除去後の120℃の粘度は1500Pa・secであった。
[Production Example 3]
A coating solution for a thermoplastic resin layer was prepared.
(Coating solution for thermoplastic resin layer: Formulation H1)
Methanol: 11.1 parts by mass Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: 6.36 parts by mass Methyl ethyl ketone: 52.4 parts by mass Methyl methacrylate / 2-ethylhexyl acrylate / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer (copolymerization composition ratio) (Molar ratio) = 55 / 11.7 / 4.5 / 28.8, molecular weight = 100,000, Tg≈70 ° C.): 5.83 parts by mass. Styrene / acrylic acid copolymer (copolymerization composition ratio (mol) Ratio) = 63/37, weight average molecular weight = 10,000, Tg≈100 ° C.): 13.6 parts by mass Monomer 1 (trade name: BPE-500, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.): 9.1 mass Part / coating aid: 0.54 parts by mass In addition, 120 ° C. after removing the solvent from the coating liquid H1 for the thermoplastic resin layer The viscosity was 1500Pa · sec.
[製造例4]
 中間層用塗布液を調製した。
(中間層用塗布液:処方P1)
・ポリビニルアルコール             :32.2質量部
  (商品名:PVA205、(株)クラレ製、鹸化度=88%、重合度550)
・ポリビニルピロリドン             :14.9質量部
  (商品名:K-30、アイエスピー・ジャパン(株)製)
・蒸留水                     :524質量部
・メタノール                   :429質量部
[Production Example 4]
An intermediate layer coating solution was prepared.
(Coating liquid for intermediate layer: prescription P1)
Polyvinyl alcohol: 32.2 parts by mass (trade name: PVA205, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., saponification degree = 88%, polymerization degree 550)
・ Polyvinylpyrrolidone: 14.9 parts by mass (trade name: K-30, manufactured by IS Japan Co., Ltd.)
-Distilled water: 524 parts by mass-Methanol: 429 parts by mass
[製造例5]
 透明接着層用塗布液を調製した。
(透明接着層用塗布液:処方)
・シリコーン樹脂溶液3(KR251、信越シリコーン(株)製、 シリコーン樹脂の固形分20質量%トルエン溶液) 90.0質量部
・シリコーン樹脂溶液4(X40-9246、信越シリコーン(株)製、 シリコーンオリゴマー)          9.90質量部
・メガファックF559 大日本インキ化学工業製      0.100質量部
[Production Example 5]
A coating solution for a transparent adhesive layer was prepared.
(Coating solution for transparent adhesive layer: prescription)
Silicone resin solution 3 (KR251, Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., silicone resin solid content 20% by weight toluene solution) 90.0 parts by mass Silicone resin solution 4 (X40-9246, Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd., silicone oligomer) 9.90 parts by mass / Mega-Fak F559 0.100 parts by mass made by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.
[製造例6]
 白色感光性樹脂層用塗布液を調製した。
(白色感光性樹脂層用塗布液:処方)
・白色顔料分散液(FP WHITE B422、山陽色素(株)、下記組成)11.2質量部
 - 白色顔料(二酸化チタン)    70.0質量%
 - 分散助剤             3.5質量%
 - 分散溶媒(メチルエチルケトン) 26.5質量%
・メチルエチルケトン            46.6質量部
・アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂(アロセットCF100、日本触媒(株))
                      31.4質量部
・ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(DPHA) (固形分76質量%、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶液)
                      10.0質量部
・イルガキュア907(BASF製)      0.640質量部
・メガファックF559 (大日本インキ化学工業製)0.100質量部
[Production Example 6]
A coating liquid for white photosensitive resin layer was prepared.
(Coating liquid for white photosensitive resin layer: prescription)
-White pigment dispersion (FP WHITE B422, Sanyo dye Co., Ltd., the following composition) 11.2 parts by mass-White pigment (titanium dioxide) 70.0% by mass
-Dispersing aid 3.5% by weight
-Dispersion solvent (methyl ethyl ketone) 26.5% by weight
・ Methyl ethyl ketone 46.6 mass parts ・ Alkali soluble acrylic resin (Alloset CF100, Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.)
31.4 parts by mass dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (DPHA) (solid content 76% by mass, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solution)
10.0 parts by mass-Irgacure 907 (manufactured by BASF) 0.640 parts by mass-Megafac F559 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink and Chemicals) 0.100 parts by mass
[実施例1]
<加飾材形成用積層材料(A-1)の作製>
 支持体B(75μm PETベース)上に熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層、および感光性樹脂層をこの順で積層した。
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、上記にて調製した熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液を、乾燥後の膜厚が15.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃3分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 中間層は、上記にて調製した中間層用塗布液を、乾燥後の膜厚が1.8μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 感光性樹脂層は、上記にて調製した緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 作製した感光性樹脂層の上には厚み12μmのポリプロピレンのカバーフィルムを圧着し、加飾材形成用積層材料(A-1)を得た。
[Example 1]
<Preparation of laminated material (A-1) for decorating material formation>
On the support B (75 μm PET base), a thermoplastic resin layer, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer were laminated in this order.
The thermoplastic resin layer is coated with the coating solution for the thermoplastic resin layer prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 15.0 μm, and then at 120 ° C. for 3 minutes. Formed by drying.
The intermediate layer is prepared by applying the intermediate layer coating solution prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 1.8 μm, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. Formed.
The photosensitive resin layer was coated with the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 μm. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes.
A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 μm was pressure-bonded onto the prepared photosensitive resin layer to obtain a laminated material (A-1) for decorating material formation.
<加飾材形成用積層材料(B)(他の加飾材形成用積層材料)の作製>
 支持体A(ユニチカ(株)製 離型層付きPETフィルム ユニピールTR-6 75μm)の離型層上に遮光層、および下地色層(白色層)をこの順に積層した。
 遮光層は、上記にて調製した黒色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 下地色層(白色層)は、上記にて調製した白色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が20μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃4分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 作製した下地色層(白色層)の上に、厚み12μmのポリプロピレンのカバーフィルムを圧着し、加飾材形成用積層材料(B)を得た。
<Production of decorative material-forming laminated material (B) (other decorative material-forming laminated materials)>
A light-shielding layer and a base color layer (white layer) were laminated in this order on the release layer of Support A (Unitika Ltd. PET film with release layer Unipeel TR-6 75 μm).
The light-shielding layer is formed by applying the black colored liquid 1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 2.0 μm, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. did.
For the base color layer (white layer), the white colored liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 20 μm, and then dried under conditions of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. Was formed.
A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 μm was pressure-bonded onto the produced base color layer (white layer) to obtain a decorative material-forming laminate material (B).
<実施例1の加飾材パターン付き基板の作製>
 カバーフィルムを剥離した加飾材形成用積層材料(A-1)を用いてガラス基板(強化ガラス、300mm×400mm×0.7mm)上に支持体B、熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層および感光性樹脂層を、感光性樹脂層側の表面とガラス基板の表面とを対向させて、基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートし、一括して積層した。
 積層後は、加飾材形成用積層材料(A-1)の支持体Bを除去した。
 その後、熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層、感光性樹脂層を転写したガラス基板に対し、フォトマスク(線幅10μmの加飾材用パターンを有する石英露光マスク)を介して50mJ/cm2の強度で波長365nmの紫外線を照射し、露光を行った。
<Preparation of substrate with decorative material pattern of Example 1>
The support B, the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer are formed on a glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm × 400 mm × 0.7 mm) using the decorative material-forming laminate material (A-1) from which the cover film is peeled off. The resin layer is laminated with the surface of the photosensitive resin layer facing the surface of the glass substrate, under conditions of a substrate temperature of 100 ° C., an upper roll temperature of 100 ° C., a lower roll temperature of 100 ° C., and a conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min. And laminated together.
After the lamination, the support B of the decorative material-forming laminated material (A-1) was removed.
Then, with respect to the glass substrate which transferred the thermoplastic resin layer, the intermediate | middle layer, and the photosensitive resin layer, with the intensity | strength of 50 mJ / cm < 2 > through a photomask (Quartz exposure mask which has a pattern for decorating materials with a line | wire width of 10 micrometers). Exposure was performed by irradiating ultraviolet rays having a wavelength of 365 nm.
 次に、トリエタノールアミン系現像液(トリエタノールアミン30質量%含有、商品名:T-PD2(富士フイルム(株)製)を純水で12倍(T-PD2を1部と純水11部の割合で混合)に希釈した液)を用いて30℃で20秒間、フラットノズル圧力0.1MPaで露光後のガラス基板をシャワー現像し、熱可塑性樹脂層と中間層とを除去した。引き続き、このガラス基板の上面にエアを吹きかけて液切りした後、純水をシャワーにより10秒間吹き付け、純水シャワー洗浄し、エアを吹きかけて基板上の液だまりを減らした。 Next, triethanolamine developer (containing 30% by mass of triethanolamine, trade name: T-PD2 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) 12 times with pure water (1 part of T-PD2 and 11 parts of pure water) The glass substrate after exposure was shower-developed at 30 ° C. for 20 seconds at a flat nozzle pressure of 0.1 MPa to remove the thermoplastic resin layer and the intermediate layer. Subsequently, after air was blown off on the upper surface of the glass substrate, pure water was sprayed for 10 seconds by a shower, pure water shower cleaning was performed, and air was blown to reduce a liquid pool on the substrate.
 その後、炭酸ナトリウム/炭酸水素ナトリウム系現像液(商品名:T-CD1(富士フイルム(株)製)を純水で5倍(T-CD1を1部と純水4部の割合で混合)に希釈した液)を用いて30℃でシャワー圧を0.1MPaに設定して、洗浄後のガラス基板を、30秒間現像した。次いで、現像後のガラス基板を純水で洗浄し、感光性樹脂層を除去することにより、ガラス基板上に、感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンを形成した。 Thereafter, a sodium carbonate / sodium hydrogen carbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) is diluted 5 times with pure water (mixed with 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water). The shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted solution), and the washed glass substrate was developed for 30 seconds. Subsequently, the glass substrate after development was washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer was removed, thereby forming a decorative material pattern on the glass substrate by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer.
 このようにして形成した加飾材パターンを有するガラス基板の加飾材パターン面上に、カバーフィルムを剥離した加飾材形成用積層材料(B)(他の加飾材形成用積層材料)を用いて、下地色層側(白色層側)の表面と加飾材パターン面側の表面とを対向させて、遮光層、下地色層(白色層)および支持体Aを一括して、基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートし、ガラス基板上に加飾材パターン、下地色層(白色層)、遮光層および支持体Aをこの順で積層した。次いで、加飾材パターン等が形成されたガラス基板を、150℃30分間加熱することにより、下地色層(白色層)を硬化して、実施例1の加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。その際、支持体Aは剥離せずに残した。 On the decorative material pattern surface of the glass substrate having the decorative material pattern thus formed, the decorative material-forming laminated material (B) (other decorative material-forming laminated material) with the cover film peeled off The surface temperature of the base color layer side (white layer side) and the surface of the decorative material pattern surface side are made to face each other, and the light shielding layer, base color layer (white layer), and support A are collectively measured at the substrate temperature. Laminated at 100 ° C., upper roll temperature of 100 ° C., lower roll temperature of 100 ° C., and conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min, decorative material pattern, ground color layer (white layer), light shielding layer and support on glass substrate A was laminated in this order. Next, the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorating material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Example 1 was produced. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
[実施例2]
<加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)の作製>
 支持体Aの離型層上に感光性樹脂層を形成した。
 感光性樹脂層は、上記にて調製した緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 作製した感光性樹脂層の上に、厚み12μmのポリプロピレンのカバーフィルムを圧着し、加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)を得た。
[Example 2]
<Preparation of laminated material for decorating material formation (A-2)>
A photosensitive resin layer was formed on the release layer of the support A.
The photosensitive resin layer was coated with the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 μm. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes.
A 12 μm-thick polypropylene cover film was pressure-bonded onto the produced photosensitive resin layer to obtain a decorative material-forming laminate material (A-2).
<実施例2の加飾材パターン付き基板の作製>
 カバーフィルムを剥離した加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)の感光性樹脂層に対し、フォトマスク(線幅10μmの加飾材用パターンを有する石英露光マスク)を介して、50mJ/cm2の強度で波長365nmの紫外線を照射し、露光を行った。
 炭酸ナトリウム/炭酸水素ナトリウム系現像液(商品名:T-CD1(富士フイルム(株)製)を純水で5倍(T-CD1を1部と純水4部の割合で混合)に希釈した液)を用いて30℃でシャワー圧を0.1MPaに設定して、露光後の加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)を30秒間現像した。次いで、現像後の加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)を純水で洗浄し、加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)上に、感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンを形成した。
 その後、加飾材パターンを形成した加飾材形成用積層材料(A-2)の加飾材パターン側の表面をガラス基板(強化ガラス、300mm×400mm×0.7mm)の表面と対向させて、基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートし、加飾材パターンおよび支持体Aをガラス基板上に積層した。積層後は、支持体Aを剥離除去した。
<Preparation of substrate with decorative material pattern of Example 2>
50 mJ / cm is applied to the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material forming laminate material (A-2) from which the cover film has been peeled off, through a photomask (quartz exposure mask having a decorative material pattern with a line width of 10 μm). Exposure was performed by irradiating with an ultraviolet ray having a wavelength of 365 nm at an intensity of 2 .
A sodium carbonate / sodium hydrogen carbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) was diluted 5 times with pure water (mixed in a ratio of 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water). The shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the liquid, and the decorative material-forming laminated material (A-2) after exposure was developed for 30 seconds. Next, the decorative material-forming laminated material (A-2) after development is washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the decorative material-forming laminated material (A-2). A decorative material pattern was formed.
After that, the surface of the decorative material pattern side of the decorative material forming laminated material (A-2) on which the decorative material pattern is formed is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm × 400 mm × 0.7 mm). The substrate temperature was 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature was 100 ° C., the lower roll temperature was 100 ° C., and the conveyance speed was 0.6 m / min, and the decorative material pattern and the support A were laminated on the glass substrate. After the lamination, the support A was peeled off.
 このようにして形成した加飾材パターン面上に、カバーフィルムを剥離した加飾材形成用積層材料(B)(他の加飾材形成用積層材料)を用いて、下地色層(白色層)側の表面を加飾材パターンの表面と対向させて、遮光層、下地色層(白色層)および支持体Aを一括して基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートし、ガラス基板上に加飾材パターン、下地色層(白色層)、遮光層および支持体Aをこの順で積層した。次いで、加飾材パターン等が形成されたガラス基板を、150℃30分間加熱することにより、下地色層(白色層)を硬化して、実施例2の加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。その際、支持体Aは剥離せずに残した。 Using the decorative material forming laminated material (B) (other decorative material forming laminated material) obtained by peeling the cover film on the decorative material pattern surface thus formed, a base color layer (white layer) ) The surface on the side faces the surface of the decorative material pattern, and the substrate layer temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 ° C., and the lower roll temperature is 100 ° C. for the light shielding layer, the base color layer (white layer) and the support A. The laminate was laminated under the condition of a conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min, and a decorative material pattern, a base color layer (white layer), a light shielding layer and a support A were laminated in this order on a glass substrate. Next, the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorating material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, thereby producing the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Example 2. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
[実施例3]
<実施例3の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1の作製>
 支持体Aの離型層上に下地色層(白色層)、および感光性樹脂層をこの順で積層した。
 下地色層(白色層)は、上記にて調製した白色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が20μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃4分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 感光性樹脂層は、上記にて調製した緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 作製した感光性樹脂層の上に、厚み12μmのポリプロピレンのカバーフィルムを圧着し、実施例3の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1を得た。
[Example 3]
<Production of decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -1 of Example 3>
On the release layer of the support A, a base color layer (white layer) and a photosensitive resin layer were laminated in this order.
For the base color layer (white layer), the white colored liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 20 μm, and then dried under conditions of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. Was formed.
The photosensitive resin layer was coated with the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 μm. Subsequently, it formed by making it dry on 120 degreeC conditions for 2 minutes.
A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 μm was pressure-bonded onto the prepared photosensitive resin layer to obtain a laminated material (i) -1 for decorating material formation of Example 3.
<実施例3の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の作製>
 カバーフィルムを剥離した加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1の感光性樹脂層に対し、フォトマスク(線幅10μmの加飾材用パターンを有する石英露光マスク)を介して50mJ/cm2の強度で波長365nmの紫外線を照射し、露光を行った。
 その後、炭酸ナトリウム/炭酸水素ナトリウム系現像液(商品名:T-CD1(富士フイルム(株)製)を純水で5倍(T-CD1を1部と純水4部の割合で混合)に希釈した液)を用いて30℃でシャワー圧を0.1MPaに設定して、露光後の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1を30秒間現像した。次いで、現像後の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1を純水で洗浄し、加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1上に、感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンを形成して、実施例3の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を得た。
<Production of decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material of Example 3>
With respect to the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -1 from which the cover film has been peeled off, 50 mJ / cm 2 through a photomask (quartz exposure mask having a decorative material pattern with a line width of 10 μm). Exposure was carried out by irradiating with ultraviolet light having a wavelength of 365 nm at an intensity of.
Then, sodium carbonate / sodium bicarbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) is diluted five times with pure water (mixed in a ratio of 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water). The shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted liquid), and the exposed decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -1 was developed for 30 seconds. Next, the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -1 after development is washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -1. A decorative material pattern was formed to obtain a decorative material pattern-containing decorative material-forming laminate material of Example 3.
<実施例3の加飾材パターン付き基板の作製>
 その後、感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンが形成された実施例3の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-1(すなわち、実施例3の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料)の加飾材パターン側の表面をガラス基板(強化ガラス、300mm×400mm×0.7mm)の表面と対向させて、基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートすることにより、ガラス基板上に一括して加飾材パターン、下地色層(白色層)および支持体Aをこの順で積層した。次いで、加飾材パターン等が形成されたガラス基板を、150℃30分間加熱することにより、下地色層(白色層)を硬化し、実施例3の加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。その際、支持体Aは剥離せずに残した。
<Production of substrate with decorative material pattern of Example 3>
Thereafter, the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -1 of Example 3 in which a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer was formed (that is, the decorative material pattern-containing additive of Example 3). The surface of the decorative material pattern side of the laminated material for decorating material) is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm × 400 mm × 0.7 mm), the substrate temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 ° C., and the lower roll is used. By laminating under conditions of a temperature of 100 ° C. and a conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min, a decorative material pattern, a base color layer (white layer) and a support A were laminated in this order on the glass substrate. Subsequently, the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorative material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorative material pattern of Example 3 was produced. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
[実施例4]
<実施例4の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2の作製>
 支持体Aの離型層上に遮光層、下地色層(白色層)、および感光性樹脂層をこの順に積層した。
 遮光層は、上記にて調製した黒色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 下地色層(白色層)は、上記にて調製した白色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が20μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃4分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 感光性樹脂層は、緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 作製した感光性樹脂層の上に、厚み12μmのポリプロピレンのカバーフィルムを圧着し、実施例4の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2を得た。
[Example 4]
<Preparation of decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -2 of Example 4>
On the release layer of the support A, a light shielding layer, a base color layer (white layer), and a photosensitive resin layer were laminated in this order.
The light-shielding layer is formed by applying the black colored liquid 1 prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 2.0 μm, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. did.
For the base color layer (white layer), the white colored liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 20 μm, and then dried under conditions of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. Was formed.
The photosensitive resin layer was coated with a green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 μm, and then at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes. It was formed by drying under the conditions of
A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 μm was pressure-bonded onto the prepared photosensitive resin layer to obtain a laminate material (i) -2 for decorating material formation of Example 4.
<実施例4の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の作製>
 カバーフィルムを剥離した加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2の感光性樹脂層に対し、フォトマスク(線幅10μmの加飾材用パターンを有する石英露光マスク)を介して、50mJ/cm2の強度で波長365nmの紫外線を照射し、露光を行った。
 その後、炭酸ナトリウム/炭酸水素ナトリウム系現像液(商品名:T-CD1(富士フイルム(株)製)を純水で5倍(T-CD1を1部と純水4部の割合で混合)に希釈した液)を用いて30℃でシャワー圧を0.1MPaに設定して、露光後の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2を30秒間現像した。次いで、現像後の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2を純水で洗浄し、加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2上に、感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンを形成し、実施例4の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を得た。
<Production of decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material of Example 4>
50 mJ / cm is applied to the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -2 from which the cover film has been peeled off, through a photomask (quartz exposure mask having a decorative material pattern with a line width of 10 μm). Exposure was performed by irradiating with an ultraviolet ray having a wavelength of 365 nm at an intensity of 2 .
Thereafter, a sodium carbonate / sodium hydrogen carbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) is diluted 5 times with pure water (mixed with 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water). The shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted solution), and the decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -2 after development was developed for 30 seconds. Next, the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -2 after development is washed with pure water, and the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -2. A decorative material pattern was formed, and a decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material of Example 4 was obtained.
<実施例4の加飾材パターン付き基板の作製>
 その後、感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンが形成された実施例4の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-2(すなわち、実施例4の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料)の加飾材パターン側の表面をガラス基板(強化ガラス、300mm×400mm×0.7mm)の表面と対向させて、基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートすることにより、ガラス基板上に一括して加飾材パターン、下地色層(白色層)遮光層および支持体Aをこの順で積層した。次いで、加飾材パターン等が形成されたガラス基板を、150℃30分間加熱することにより、下地色層(白色層)を硬化して、実施例4の加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。その際、支持体Aは剥離せずに残した。
<Preparation of substrate with decorative material pattern of Example 4>
Thereafter, the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -2 of Example 4 in which the decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer was formed (that is, the decorative material pattern-containing additive of Example 4). The surface of the decorative material pattern side of the laminated material for decorating material) is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm × 400 mm × 0.7 mm), the substrate temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 ° C., and the lower roll is used. By laminating under conditions of a temperature of 100 ° C. and a conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min, a decorative material pattern, a base color layer (white layer) light-shielding layer and a support A were laminated in this order on the glass substrate. . Subsequently, the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorating material pattern or the like was formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Example 4 was produced. At that time, the support A was left without peeling.
[実施例5]
<実施例5の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-3の作製>
 支持体C(下地色層であるアルミ蒸着層付き25μmPETベース、アルミ蒸着層400Å(0.04μm)、麗光社製、ダイアラスター)のアルミ蒸着層(下地色層)上に、透明接着層、および白色感光性樹脂層をこの順に積層した。
 透明接着層は、上記にて調製した透明接着層用塗布液を、乾燥後の膜厚が15μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃3分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 白色感光性樹脂層は、上記にて調製した白色感光性樹脂層用塗布液を、乾燥後の膜厚が4.5μmとなるように、ダイコーターを用いて塗布し、次いで120℃3分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 白色感光性樹脂層の上に、厚み12μmのポリプロピレンのカバーフィルムを圧着し、実施例5の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-3を得た。
[Example 5]
<Preparation of decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -3 of Example 5>
On the aluminum vapor deposition layer (underlying color layer) of the support C (25 μm PET base with an aluminum vapor deposition layer as a base color layer, aluminum vapor deposition layer 400 mm (0.04 μm), manufactured by Reiko Co., Ltd.), a transparent adhesive layer, And a white photosensitive resin layer were laminated in this order.
The transparent adhesive layer is prepared by applying the coating liquid for transparent adhesive layer prepared above using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying is 15 μm, and then drying it at 120 ° C. for 3 minutes. Formed.
For the white photosensitive resin layer, the white photosensitive resin layer coating solution prepared above was applied using a die coater so that the film thickness after drying was 4.5 μm, and then the temperature was 120 ° C. for 3 minutes. It was formed by drying under conditions.
A polypropylene cover film having a thickness of 12 μm was pressure-bonded onto the white photosensitive resin layer to obtain a decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -3 of Example 5.
<実施例5の(白色)加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の作製>
 加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-3の白色感光性樹脂層に対し、フォトマスク(線幅10μmの加飾材用パターンを有する石英露光マスク)を介して500mJ/cm2の強度で波長365nmの紫外線を照射し、露光を行った。
 その後、炭酸ナトリウム/炭酸水素ナトリウム系現像液(商品名:T-CD1(富士フイルム(株)製)を純水で5倍(T-CD1を1部と純水4部の割合で混合)に希釈した液)を用いて30℃でシャワー圧を0.1MPaに設定して、露光後の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-3を29℃で180秒間現像した。次いで、現像後の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-3を純水で洗浄し、加飾材形成用積層材料(i-3)上に(白色)感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンを形成し、実施例5の(白色)加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を得た。
<Production of (white) decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminated material of Example 5>
The wavelength of the white photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminated material (i) -3 with an intensity of 500 mJ / cm 2 through a photomask (quartz exposure mask having a decorative material pattern with a line width of 10 μm) Exposure was performed by irradiating with 365 nm ultraviolet rays.
Thereafter, a sodium carbonate / sodium hydrogen carbonate developer (trade name: T-CD1 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) is diluted 5 times with pure water (mixed with 1 part of T-CD1 and 4 parts of pure water). The shower pressure was set to 0.1 MPa at 30 ° C. using the diluted solution), and the exposed decorative material-forming laminate material (i) -3 was developed at 29 ° C. for 180 seconds. Next, the laminated material for forming a decorative material (i) -3 after development is washed with pure water, and the (white) photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on the laminated material for forming a decorative material (i-3). The decorative material pattern formed was formed, and the (white) decorative material pattern-containing decorative material forming laminate material of Example 5 was obtained.
<実施例5の(白色)加飾材パターン付き基板の作製>
 その後、(白色)感光性樹脂層を露光および現像してなる加飾材パターンが形成された実施例5の加飾材形成用積層材料(i)-3(すなわち、実施例5の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料)の加飾材パターン側の表面を、ガラス基板(強化ガラス、300mm×400mm×0.7mm)の表面と対向させて、基板温度100℃、上ロール温度100℃、下ロール温度100℃、搬送速度0.6m/minの条件でラミネートすることにより、ガラス基板上に(白色)加飾材パターン(白色感光性樹脂層を露光および、現像してなる層)、透明接着層、下地色層(アルミ蒸着層)およびPETベース(支持体C)をこの順で積層した。次いで、加飾材パターン等が形成されたガラス基板を、150℃30分間加熱することにより、下地色層(白色層)を硬化し、実施例5の加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。その際、支持体CのPETベースは剥離せずに残した。
<Preparation of a substrate with a (white) decorative material pattern of Example 5>
Thereafter, the decorative material forming laminate material (i) -3 of Example 5 in which a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the (white) photosensitive resin layer was formed (that is, the decorative material of Example 5) The surface of the decorative material pattern side of the laminate material for pattern-containing decorative material formation) is opposed to the surface of the glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm × 400 mm × 0.7 mm), the substrate temperature is 100 ° C., the upper roll temperature is 100 (White) decorative material pattern (layer formed by exposing and developing a white photosensitive resin layer) on a glass substrate by laminating under the conditions of ℃, lower roll temperature of 100 ℃, and conveyance speed of 0.6 m / min A transparent adhesive layer, a base color layer (aluminum vapor deposition layer), and a PET base (support C) were laminated in this order. Subsequently, the base color layer (white layer) was cured by heating the glass substrate on which the decorative material pattern and the like were formed at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes, and the substrate with the decorative material pattern of Example 5 was produced. At that time, the PET base of the support C was left without peeling.
[実施例11~14]
 実施例1~4の加飾材形成用積層材料の作製において、下地色層(白色層)の形成に用いる白色着色液1を白色着色液2に変更した以外は実施例1~4の加飾材形成用積層材料の作製とそれぞれ同様にして、実施例11~14の加飾材形成用積層材料を作製し、これらを用いて実施例11~14の加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料、ならびに、実施例11~14の加飾材パターン付き基板を製造した。
[Examples 11 to 14]
The decoration of Examples 1 to 4 except that the white colored liquid 1 used for forming the base color layer (white layer) was changed to the white colored liquid 2 in the production of the decorative material forming laminated material of Examples 1 to 4. In the same manner as the production of the material forming laminated material, the decorative material forming laminated material of Examples 11 to 14 was produced, and using these, the decorative material pattern-containing decorative material of Examples 11 to 14 was formed. The laminated material and the substrate with the decorating material pattern of Examples 11 to 14 were manufactured.
[比較例1]
<比較例1の加飾材パターン付き基板の作製>
 ガラス基板(強化ガラス、300mm×400mm×0.7mm)上に加飾材パターンを形成した。加飾材パターンは、上記にて調製した緑色(G)感光性樹脂層形成用塗布液CG-1をインクとしてスクリーン印刷機を用いることにより乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように印刷し、次いで、120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより形成した。
 さらに加飾材パターン上に、上記にて調製した白色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が20μmとなるように、スクリーン印刷機を用いて塗布し、次いで120℃4分間の条件で乾燥させることにより下地色層(白色層)を形成した。
 さらに下地色層(白色層)上に、上記にて調製した黒色着色液1を、乾燥後の膜厚が2.0μmとなるように、スクリーン印刷機を用いて塗布し、次いで、120℃2分間の条件で乾燥させることにより遮光層を形成した。
 このようにして、ガラス基板上に加飾材パターン、下地色層(白色層)、および遮光層がこの順に積層された比較例1の加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。
[Comparative Example 1]
<Preparation of substrate with decorative material pattern of Comparative Example 1>
A decorative material pattern was formed on a glass substrate (tempered glass, 300 mm × 400 mm × 0.7 mm). The decorative material pattern is printed so that the film thickness after drying becomes 2.0 μm by using a screen printing machine using the green (G) photosensitive resin layer forming coating solution CG-1 prepared above as an ink. And then dried at 120 ° C. for 2 minutes.
Furthermore, on the decorative material pattern, the white coloring liquid 1 prepared above is applied using a screen printer so that the film thickness after drying is 20 μm, and then dried under the condition of 120 ° C. for 4 minutes. As a result, a base color layer (white layer) was formed.
Further, the black colored liquid 1 prepared above was applied onto the base color layer (white layer) using a screen printer so that the film thickness after drying was 2.0 μm, and then 120 ° C. 2 A light-shielding layer was formed by drying under conditions of minutes.
Thus, the board | substrate with the decorating material pattern of the comparative example 1 by which the decorating material pattern, the base color layer (white layer), and the light shielding layer were laminated | stacked in this order on the glass substrate was produced.
[参考例1]
 実施例5において、支持体Cの代わりに支持体D(アルミ蒸着層(すなわち下地色層)がない25μmPETベース)を用いた以外は実施例5と同様にして加飾材形成用積層材料Gを作製し、次いで、実施例5と同様にして参考例1の(白色)加飾材パターン付き基板を作製した。
 なお、参考例1は、金属光沢層を組み合わせたときの白色層の隠ぺい力を明確化するための参考例である。
[Reference Example 1]
In Example 5, a laminated material G for decorating material formation was used in the same manner as in Example 5 except that instead of the support C, a support D (25 μm PET base having no aluminum vapor deposition layer (that is, a base color layer)) was used. Next, a substrate with a (white) decorative material pattern of Reference Example 1 was produced in the same manner as in Example 5.
Reference example 1 is a reference example for clarifying the hiding power of the white layer when the metallic gloss layer is combined.
[評価]
<膜厚バラツキの評価>
 得られた各実施例、参考例および比較例の加飾材パターン付き基板の(白色)感光性樹脂層および下地色層(白色層または金属光沢層)の膜厚について、触針式膜厚計(TENCOR社製、商品名Surface Profiler P-10)により、9cm×9cm内の領域でn=20点の測定を行った。
 白色層の膜厚は、カミソリを用いて白色層の一部をガラスから除去し、むき出しになったガラス面と近傍の白色層表面の段差を、上記P-10を用いて測定することにより得た。
 20点の測定値より以下の式で計算される膜厚バラツキを計算した。その結果を下記表2に記載した。
(式)
 膜厚バラツキ=(膜厚の最大値-膜厚の最小値)/(膜厚の平均値)×100%
[Evaluation]
<Evaluation of film thickness variation>
For the film thicknesses of the (white) photosensitive resin layer and the base color layer (white layer or metallic luster layer) of the substrates with decorative material patterns of the obtained Examples, Reference Examples and Comparative Examples, a stylus type film thickness meter Measurement was performed at n = 20 points in an area of 9 cm × 9 cm according to (trade name Surface Profiler P-10, manufactured by TENCOR).
The thickness of the white layer is obtained by removing a part of the white layer from the glass with a razor and measuring the level difference between the exposed glass surface and the surface of the adjacent white layer using the above P-10. It was.
The film thickness variation calculated by the following formula was calculated from the measured values at 20 points. The results are shown in Table 2 below.
(formula)
Film thickness variation = (maximum film thickness-minimum film thickness) / (average film thickness) x 100%
<パターニング精度(加飾材パターン線幅)の評価>
 得られた各実施例、参考例および比較例の加飾材パターン付き基板の加飾材パターン線幅を、光学顕微鏡と画像解析ソフト(オリンパス社製、商品名XM51、およびミカサ社製 Cp-30)を用いて、任意の20か所を測定し、その平均値を求めてパターニング精度を評価した。その結果を下記表2に記載した。
<Evaluation of patterning accuracy (decorative material pattern line width)>
The decorative material pattern line widths of the substrates with the decorative material patterns of the obtained Examples, Reference Examples and Comparative Examples were measured using an optical microscope and image analysis software (manufactured by Olympus Corporation, trade name: XM51, and Mikasa Co., Ltd., Cp-30). ) Was used to measure 20 arbitrary locations, and the average value was obtained to evaluate the patterning accuracy. The results are shown in Table 2 below.
<白色加飾材パターンの隠ぺい力の評価>
得られた実施例5および参考例1の加飾材パターン付き基板の白色加飾材パターンの隠ぺい力は、加飾材パターン付き基板の下に黒紙と白紙を、隙間を空けずに並べて敷き、黒紙と白紙の間の境界部分が、加飾材を通して透けて見える度合いを官能評価した。
A: 黒紙と白紙の境界が透けて見えない。
B: 黒紙と白紙の境界が透けて見える。
<Evaluation of hiding power of white decorative material pattern>
The hiding power of the white decorative material pattern of the substrate with the decorative material pattern obtained in Example 5 and Reference Example 1 was laid out by placing black paper and white paper under the decorative material pattern substrate without gaps. The degree to which the boundary portion between the black paper and the white paper was seen through the decorating material was sensory evaluated.
A: The border between black paper and white paper cannot be seen through.
B: The border between black paper and white paper can be seen through.
<白色加飾材パターン白色度の評価>
得られた実施例5および参考例1の加飾材パターン付き基板の白色加飾材パターンの白色度は、加飾材パターン付き基板の下に黒紙を敷き、色相(L*、a*、b*)を測定して評価した。評価は測色計(CM-700d、コニカミノルタセンシング株式会社製、SCIモード、D65光源、10°測定)を用いて、加飾材パターン付き基板側から測定した。
<Evaluation of white decorating material pattern whiteness>
The whiteness of the white decorative material pattern of the obtained substrate with a decorative material pattern of Example 5 and Reference Example 1 was laid with black paper under the substrate with the decorative material pattern, and the hue (L *, a *, b *) was measured and evaluated. Evaluation was performed from the substrate side with the decorating material pattern using a colorimeter (CM-700d, manufactured by Konica Minolta Sensing Co., Ltd., SCI mode, D65 light source, 10 ° measurement).
<ガラス飛散性(落下テスト)の評価>
 得られた各実施例、参考例および比較例の加飾材パターン付き基板を、5mの高さから初速ゼロで、コンクリート製の床面に自由落下させた。
 以下の評価基準で評価した。その結果を下記表2に記載した。
A:ガラスは割れるが、飛散はしない
B:ガラスが割れて、飛散する
<Evaluation of glass scattering property (drop test)>
The obtained substrates with decorating material patterns of Examples, Reference Examples and Comparative Examples were freely dropped from a height of 5 m to a concrete floor at an initial speed of zero.
Evaluation was made according to the following evaluation criteria. The results are shown in Table 2 below.
A: Glass breaks but does not scatter B: Glass breaks and scatters
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000008
 上記表2より、本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法で製造された本発明の加飾材パターン付き基板は、加飾材パターン(白色感光性樹脂層を露光、および現像してなる層)および下地色層の膜厚のバラツキが少なく、高精度な加飾材パターンを有することがわかった。
 より詳しくは、実施例1~4および11~14の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法ではダイコーターによりフィルム状態で連続的に安定して塗布することができるため、膜厚のバラツキが少ない均一な加飾材パターン付き基板を作製することができた。実施例5の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法では、下地色層がアルミ蒸着層であるため、膜厚バラツキが少ない均質な膜となった。一方で、比較例1の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法では、膜厚のバラツキが大きくなった。
 実施例1~5および11~14の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法では、フィルム状態の塗布物を作製する際に、ダイコーターにより連続的に安定して塗布を行えるため、均質な品質の加飾材形成用積層材料を大量に生産することができ、当該加飾材形成用積層材料を積層することにより、効率的に加飾材パターン付き基板を大量生産することができた。一方で、比較例1では1枚ずつ塗布と乾燥を行うため、塗布と乾燥に時間がかかり、効率的に加飾材パターン付き基板を生産することが出来なかった。
From the said Table 2, the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention manufactured with the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of this invention exposes and develops a decorating material pattern (white photosensitive resin layer). It was found that there was little variation in the film thickness of the layer) and the base color layer, and a highly accurate decorative material pattern was provided.
More specifically, in the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of Examples 1 to 4 and 11 to 14, since it can be continuously and stably applied in a film state by a die coater, there is little variation in film thickness. A substrate with a decorative material pattern could be produced. In the manufacturing method of the substrate with a decorating material pattern of Example 5, since the ground color layer was an aluminum vapor deposition layer, it became a homogeneous film with little film thickness variation. On the other hand, in the manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of the comparative example 1, the variation in film thickness became large.
In the method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern of Examples 1 to 5 and 11 to 14, when a film-like coating material is produced, it can be continuously and stably applied by a die coater. The laminate material for decorating material formation was able to be produced in large quantities, and the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern was efficiently mass-produced by laminating | stacking the said laminate material for decorating material formation. On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1, since coating and drying were performed one by one, it took time for coating and drying, and it was not possible to efficiently produce a substrate with a decorating material pattern.
 実施例1~5および11~14の加飾材パターン付き基板は、基板として強化ガラス基板を用いている。このような強化ガラス基板を用いた実施例1~5および11~14の加飾材パターン付き基板は、加飾材形成用積層材料の支持体(フィルム)であるPETが加飾材パターン付き基板に含まれているため、落下によりガラス基板が割れても、割れたガラスが飛散せずに安全性に優れる。一方で、比較例1の強化ガラス基板を用いた加飾材パターン付き基板は、割れたガラスが飛散して安全性に劣った。 The substrates with decorating material patterns of Examples 1 to 5 and 11 to 14 use a tempered glass substrate as the substrate. In the substrates with decorating material patterns of Examples 1 to 5 and 11 to 14 using such a tempered glass substrate, PET that is a support (film) of the laminated material for decorating material formation is a substrate with a decorating material pattern. Therefore, even if the glass substrate breaks due to falling, the broken glass is not scattered and excellent in safety. On the other hand, the decorative material-patterned substrate using the tempered glass substrate of Comparative Example 1 was inferior in safety because the broken glass was scattered.
 なお、上記表2より、アルミ蒸着層である金属光沢層(下地色層)と白色感光性樹脂層を併用した実施例5の加飾材パターン付き基板は、白色感光性樹脂層の厚みが4.5μmであっても隠ぺい力と白色性が高いことがわかった。白色性が高いことはL*が高いことと、a*、b*が低いことから判断される。
 一方、金属光沢層(下地色層)なしで、4.5μmの白色感光性樹脂層を設けた参考例1の加飾材パターン付き基板は、隠ぺい力や白色性が低いことがわかった。
In addition, from the said Table 2, as for the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of Example 5 which used together the metallic glossy layer (underlying color layer) and white photosensitive resin layer which are aluminum vapor deposition layers, the thickness of the white photosensitive resin layer is 4 It was found that the hiding power and whiteness were high even at .5 μm. High whiteness is determined by L * being high and a * and b * being low.
On the other hand, it was found that the decorative material-patterned substrate of Reference Example 1 provided with a 4.5 μm white photosensitive resin layer without a metallic luster layer (underlying color layer) has low hiding power and whiteness.

Claims (21)

  1.  支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、形成された前記加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;
     支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を基板に積層する工程と、積層された前記感光性樹脂層を露光および現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程;または、
     支持体上に、感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記加飾材パターンを基板に積層する工程;のいずれかの工程を含み、
     下記条件(M)または条件(N)を満たす加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。
    条件(M):前記加飾材形成用積層材料の前記支持体と前記感光性樹脂層との間、または前記加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料の前記支持体と前記加飾材パターンとの間に、下地色層を有する。
    条件(N):支持体上に下地色層を有する他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含む。
    A step of exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material having a photosensitive resin layer on the support to form a decorative material pattern, and the formed decorative material pattern on the substrate Laminating step;
    A step of laminating the photosensitive resin layer of a decorative material forming laminate material having a photosensitive resin layer on a support on a substrate, and exposing and developing the laminated photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern Forming; or
    Any of the processes of laminating | stacking the said decorating material pattern of the decorating material pattern containing laminated material for decorating material formation which has a decorating material pattern in which the photosensitive resin layer is exposed and developed on a support body on a board | substrate. Including the steps of
    The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern which satisfy | fills the following conditions (M) or conditions (N).
    Condition (M): Between the support of the laminate material for decorating material formation and the photosensitive resin layer, or the support of the decorating material pattern-containing laminate material for decorating material and the decorating material. A base color layer is provided between the patterns.
    Condition (N): including a step of laminating the base color layer of another decorating material forming laminated material having a base color layer on the support on the decorating material pattern.
  2.  前記条件(M)を満たし、
     前記支持体上に前記下地色層および前記感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する前記加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンが形成された加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を調製する工程と、
     前記加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を、基板に前記加飾材パターン側を対向させた状態で、当該基板に積層する工程を含む請求項1に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。
    Satisfying the condition (M),
    Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the laminated material for decorative material formation having the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support;
    Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to prepare a decorative material pattern-containing laminated material for forming a decorative material pattern in which a decorative material pattern is formed; and
    The board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of Claim 1 including the process of laminating | stacking the said decorating material pattern containing laminated material for decorating material formation on the said board | substrate with the said decorating material pattern side facing the board | substrate. Manufacturing method.
  3.  前記条件(M)を満たし、
     前記支持体上に前記下地色層ならびに前記感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンをこの順に有する前記加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料を、基板に前記加飾材パターン側を対向させた状態で、当該基板に積層する工程を含む請求項1に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。
    Satisfying the condition (M),
    The decorating material pattern-containing laminate material for forming a decorating material pattern having a decorating material pattern formed by exposing and developing the base color layer and the photosensitive resin layer in this order on the support, and the decorating material on a substrate. The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of Claim 1 including the process laminated | stacked on the said board | substrate in the state which made the material pattern side oppose.
  4.  前記条件(N)を満たし、
     前記支持体上に前記感光性樹脂層を有する前記加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記加飾材形成用積層材料(A)の前記加飾材パターンを基板上に積層する工程と、
     前記支持体上に前記下地色層を有する前記他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含む請求項1に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。
    Satisfying the condition (N),
    Exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material having the photosensitive resin layer on the support;
    Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and
    Laminating the decorative material pattern of the decorative material forming laminate material (A) on a substrate;
    With the decorating material pattern of Claim 1 including the process of laminating | stacking the said base color layer of the said other laminated material for decorating material formation which has the said base color layer on the said support body on the said decorating material pattern. A method for manufacturing a substrate.
  5.  前記条件(N)を満たし、
     前記支持体上に前記感光性樹脂層を有する前記加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層を前記基板上に積層する工程と、
     前記支持体を前記感光性樹脂層から剥離する工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層を露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して加飾材パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記支持体上に前記下地色層を有する前記他の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記下地色層を前記加飾材パターン上に積層する工程を含む請求項1に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。
    Satisfying the condition (N),
    Laminating the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material-forming laminate material having the photosensitive resin layer on the support, on the substrate;
    Peeling the support from the photosensitive resin layer;
    Exposing the photosensitive resin layer;
    Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a decorative material pattern; and
    With the decorating material pattern of Claim 1 including the process of laminating | stacking the said base color layer of the said other laminated material for decorating material formation which has the said base color layer on the said support body on the said decorating material pattern. A method for manufacturing a substrate.
  6.  前記支持体と前記下地色層の間に遮光層を有し、前記下地色層および前記遮光層を一括して前記基板上に積層する請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The decoration according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a light-shielding layer between the support and the base color layer, wherein the base color layer and the light-shield layer are stacked on the substrate in a lump. A method for manufacturing a substrate with a material pattern.
  7.  前記下地色層が白色層である請求項1~6のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The method for producing a substrate with a decorative material pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the base color layer is a white layer.
  8.  前記下地色層が金属光沢層である請求項2または3に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the base color layer is a metallic luster layer.
  9.  前記金属光沢層に隣接して、かつ前記支持体とは反対側の表面に透明接着層を有する請求項8に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The manufacturing method of the board | substrate with a decorating material pattern of Claim 8 which has a transparent contact bonding layer on the surface on the opposite side to the said support body adjacent to the said metallic luster layer.
  10.  前記金属光沢層が金属薄膜層である請求項8または9に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the metallic luster layer is a metal thin film layer.
  11.  前記感光性樹脂層が光重合開始剤およびエチレン性不飽和化合物を含む請求項1~10のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the photosensitive resin layer contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  12.  前記感光性樹脂層が染料または顔料を含む請求項1~11のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法。 The method for producing a substrate with a decorating material pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the photosensitive resin layer contains a dye or a pigment.
  13.  請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材パターン付き基板の製造方法により製造された加飾材パターン付き基板。 A substrate with a decorative material pattern manufactured by the method for manufacturing a substrate with a decorative material pattern according to any one of claims 1 to 12.
  14.  支持体上に下地色層および感光性樹脂層をこの順に有する加飾材形成用積層材料。 Decorative material forming laminate material having a base color layer and a photosensitive resin layer in this order on a support.
  15.  前記支持体と前記下地色層の間に遮光層を有する請求項14に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料。 The laminate material for decorating material formation according to claim 14, further comprising a light shielding layer between the support and the base color layer.
  16.  前記下地色層が白色層または金属光沢層である請求項14または15に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料。 The laminated material for decorating material formation according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the base color layer is a white layer or a metallic luster layer.
  17.  前記下地色層が金属光沢層であり、
     前記金属光沢層に隣接して、かつ前記支持体とは反対側の表面に透明接着層を有する請求項16に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料。
    The base color layer is a metallic luster layer;
    The laminated material for decorating material formation of Claim 16 which has a transparent contact bonding layer on the surface on the opposite side to the said support body adjacent to the said metallic luster layer.
  18.  前記金属光沢層が金属薄膜層である請求項16または17に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料。 The laminated material for forming a decorating material according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the metallic luster layer is a metal thin film layer.
  19.  前記感光性樹脂層が光重合開始剤およびエチレン性不飽和化合物を含む請求項14~18のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料。 The decorative material-forming laminated material according to any one of claims 14 to 18, wherein the photosensitive resin layer contains a photopolymerization initiator and an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  20.  前記感光性樹脂層が染料または顔料を含む請求項14~19のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料。 The decorative material-forming laminated material according to any one of claims 14 to 19, wherein the photosensitive resin layer contains a dye or a pigment.
  21.  請求項14~20のいずれか一項に記載の加飾材形成用積層材料の前記感光性樹脂層が露光および現像されてなる加飾材パターンを有する加飾材パターン含有加飾材形成用積層材料。 The decorative material pattern-containing laminate for decorative material formation, which has a decorative material pattern formed by exposing and developing the photosensitive resin layer of the decorative material forming laminate material according to any one of claims 14 to 20. material.
PCT/JP2014/064370 2013-06-17 2014-05-30 Substrate with decorative material pattern, method for producing same, multilayer material for decorative material formation, and decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation WO2014203707A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-127000 2013-06-17
JP2013127000 2013-06-17
JP2013138227A JP2015024498A (en) 2013-06-17 2013-07-01 Substrate with decorative material pattern and method for producing the same, multilayer material for forming decorative material, and decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for forming decorative material
JP2013-138227 2013-07-01

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014203707A1 true WO2014203707A1 (en) 2014-12-24

Family

ID=52104449

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/064370 WO2014203707A1 (en) 2013-06-17 2014-05-30 Substrate with decorative material pattern, method for producing same, multilayer material for decorative material formation, and decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2015024498A (en)
TW (1) TW201501921A (en)
WO (1) WO2014203707A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS60196747A (en) * 1984-03-19 1985-10-05 Kimoto & Co Ltd Photosensitive image-forming material
JP2003255115A (en) * 2002-03-06 2003-09-10 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Diffraction structure formation body with patterned metal reflecting layer and its manufacturing method, diffraction structure transfer foil, diffraction structure sticker, and information recording medium with diffraction structure
JP2004314402A (en) * 2003-04-15 2004-11-11 Toyobo Co Ltd Photosensitive resin laminate and plate material for sign-board comprising it
JP2004317978A (en) * 2003-04-18 2004-11-11 Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corp Method for manufacturing photosensitive resin plate

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11321478A (en) * 1998-03-16 1999-11-24 Pacific Ind Co Ltd Manufacture of vehicular resin-made metallic decoration part
JP2002103491A (en) * 2000-09-29 2002-04-09 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Decorative laminated sheet
JP2005043749A (en) * 2003-07-24 2005-02-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Antireflection coating, antireflection film, polarizing plate, image display device and hard-coated article
JP4391204B2 (en) * 2003-11-07 2009-12-24 大日本印刷株式会社 Adhesive decorative sheet and decorative glass plate

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS60196747A (en) * 1984-03-19 1985-10-05 Kimoto & Co Ltd Photosensitive image-forming material
JP2003255115A (en) * 2002-03-06 2003-09-10 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Diffraction structure formation body with patterned metal reflecting layer and its manufacturing method, diffraction structure transfer foil, diffraction structure sticker, and information recording medium with diffraction structure
JP2004314402A (en) * 2003-04-15 2004-11-11 Toyobo Co Ltd Photosensitive resin laminate and plate material for sign-board comprising it
JP2004317978A (en) * 2003-04-18 2004-11-11 Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corp Method for manufacturing photosensitive resin plate

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201501921A (en) 2015-01-16
JP2015024498A (en) 2015-02-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5857013B2 (en) SUBSTRATE WITH DECORATION MATERIAL AND ITS MANUFACTURING METHOD, TOUCH PANEL AND INFORMATION DISPLAY DEVICE
JP5922008B2 (en) TRANSFER FILM AND TRANSPARENT LAMINATE, ITS MANUFACTURING METHOD, CAPACITANCE TYPE INPUT DEVICE, AND IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE
WO2014007050A1 (en) Transparent layered body, electrostatic capacitance input device, and image display device
JP6407249B2 (en) Base material with decorating material and method for manufacturing the same, touch panel, and information display device
WO2016152373A1 (en) Transfer film, protection film for electrode of capacitive input device, laminate, method for producing laminate and capacitive input device
WO2015125853A1 (en) Transfer film, method for manufacturing transfer film, transparent laminate, method for manufacturing transparent laminate, capacitance-type input device, and image display device
TW201543300A (en) Photosensitive laminate, transfer material, patterned photosensitive laminate and production method thereof, touch panel and image display device
JP6030966B2 (en) Transparent laminate and method for producing the same
TW201720652A (en) Transfer film, method of manufacturing film sensor, film sensor, front face plate integrated sensor and image display device
CN109073970B (en) Transfer film, decorative pattern, and touch panel
US20190094693A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, transfer film, decorative pattern, touch panel, and manufacturing method of pattern
JP5252919B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material
TWI658939B (en) Laminated material manufacturing method, laminated material, transparent laminated body manufacturing method, transparent laminated body, electrostatic capacitance type input device and image display device
JP6707128B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, transfer film, pattern manufacturing method, decorative pattern, and touch panel
JP6155235B2 (en) Transfer film, transparent laminate, and capacitive input device
WO2017208848A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, transfer film, decorative pattern and touch panel
WO2014203707A1 (en) Substrate with decorative material pattern, method for producing same, multilayer material for decorative material formation, and decorative material pattern-containing multilayer material for decorative material formation
JP6404255B2 (en) TRANSFER FILM AND TRANSPARENT LAMINATE, ITS MANUFACTURING METHOD, CAPACITANCE TYPE INPUT DEVICE, AND IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE
JP6646107B2 (en) Transfer film and transparent laminate, method for producing them, capacitance input device, and image display device
WO2015141762A1 (en) Pigment dispersion, white decorative material, transfer material for white decorative material formation, substrate provided with white decorative material, touch panel, and information display device
JP4792321B2 (en) Photosensitive resin transfer material, color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and image display device
JP2017185762A (en) Transfer film, decorative material, touch panel and manufacturing method of decorative material
JP2020073326A (en) Transfer film and transparent laminate, method for manufacturing the same, electrostatic capacitive input device and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14813878

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14813878

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1